JP6881764B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of converting a variable winning device into a state in which a gaming ball can easily win a prize when the result of a game executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition becomes a special result.

A predetermined number of balls counting means for counting the game balls entered in the big winning means, a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding whether or not to win, and a predetermined specified time when the lottery result by the lottery means is a hit. A special game control means configured to be able to control the large prize-winning means in an open state until the number of game balls counted by the number-of-balls counting means reaches the specified number of balls within a range not exceeding the specified number of balls, and the specified number of balls or less. A special winning effect control means that controls execution of a normal winning effect that notifies information about the occurrence of a winning ball, and a special that executes and controls an over-winning effect that notifies information about the occurrence of an over-winning that exceeds the specified number of balls. A game machine equipped with a winning production control means is known (
See Patent Document 1).
In addition to the over-winning to the large winning opening (large winning means), the over-winning includes the over-winning to the starting winning opening.

JP-A-2017-86100

With conventional gaming machines, it has not been possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the production of notifying that the number of winning game balls to the winning opening has exceeded a predetermined number.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of an effect of notifying that the number of winning game balls to the winning opening has exceeded a predetermined predetermined number.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that generates a predetermined gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition becomes a special result.
When a predetermined numerical value in the predetermined gaming state exceeds a predetermined number, a specified number breakthrough effect means for executing a specified number breakthrough effect for notifying that the predetermined number has been exceeded is provided.
The specified number breakthrough effect means can suggest predetermined information in the specified number breakthrough effect.
The predetermined information includes a first predetermined information and a second predetermined information of a type different from the first predetermined information.
When the result mode of the game is the first result mode, the first predetermined information is suggested as the predetermined information, and the result mode of the game is a second result mode different from the first result mode. The second predetermined information is suggested as the predetermined information.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of notifying that the number of winning game balls to the winning opening has exceeded a predetermined number.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 variation start process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of the probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the determination condition monitoring process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means and the game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in the 6th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation processing in the 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability set value confirmation process in the tenth modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode in 11th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the jackpot end setting process 1, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit end processing. It is a figure explaining the over prize notification production. It is a figure explaining the over prize notification production. It is a figure explaining the over prize notification production. It is a figure explaining the over prize notification production. It is a figure explaining the over prize notification production. It is a figure explaining the prize number notification production. It is a figure explaining the prize number notification production. It is a figure explaining the prize number notification production. It is a figure explaining the prize number notification production. It is a figure explaining the prize number notification production. It is a figure explaining the prize number notification production. It is a figure explaining the prize number notification production. It is a figure explaining the payout number notification effect. It is a figure explaining the payout number notification effect. It is a figure explaining the payout number notification effect.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, the front frame (main body frame) 12 has a game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red) A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing and an operation handle 24 for a hitting ball launching device are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section that displays the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is configured to be surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. Display 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, a board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game, is provided by an operating movable effect member. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left of the center case 40, a sub that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the start memory number. An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit composed of a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A second sub composed of a sub-game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. It includes a game display unit 92. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game are executed by the two light emitting units. A second sub-display unit 94 indicating the number of second start-up memories, which is the right to play, is provided.

In the first sub-game display unit 91 and the second sub-game display unit 92, the light emitting unit turns off, blinks, and lights a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the variation display and a display indicating the result. Can be displayed by. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 turn off the two light emitting units, respectively, for the number of the first start memory (holding the special figure 1) and the second start memory (holding the special figure 2). It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 4.
By displaying in 1, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied, and the display area can be effectively utilized. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board effect device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (normal figure start gate, start area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that won the prize at the normal drawing start gate 34 is the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Detected by.
Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side.
It always holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may win a prize in the closed state rather than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. From the closed state (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (closed state)
Convert to a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 is, for example,
Opening and closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device
It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be opened and closed by the player, and during a special gaming state or a small hit game state, which is a predetermined gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the large winning opening can be changed from a closed state to an open state. The inflow of game balls into the winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), there is a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.
Are arranged. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided.
The game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36, and launches the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), you can start the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 3
It is possible to aim for a prize in 7 or the special variable prize device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and is launched into the right gaming region. The resulting game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for notifying the starting memory number of each variable display game composed of.
Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed notification unit) 57 that notifies that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed game state, and the time is shortened. When a state occurs, the second game state display unit (second game state display, time reduction state notification unit) 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of a time saving state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. Third game status display unit (third game status display, probability status display unit) 59,
Round display unit 6 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed)
0 is provided.
The batch display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven to fluctuate. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is out of order. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the normal figure hold indicator 56 displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 53, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. Special figure 1 Hold indicator 54
Is the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. indicate. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= number of holds) of the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting.

The first game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off when the left-handed is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed in the gaming state (normal hitting). When the player is in a gaming state where right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

The second game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off in the normal game state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur. When the time saving state occurs (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the game machine 1
When the power of 0 is turned on, the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the game machine 10 is turned on, the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change state). Turns on the lamp.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and D generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates the DC voltage of DC32V from the AC power supply of 24V.
The power supply voltage is applied to the normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage and the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure. Supply backup power supply unit 420
The game control device 100 is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
The data supplied to 1 (particularly the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power cutoff. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is cut off. Then, when the power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops below 17V, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It includes M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). State that became identification information,
However, the special result mode may be set to the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result of a special figure variation display game (hit (hit (hit
Big hit or small hit) or miss), the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the operating state (time reduction) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current game state One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the operating state), the number of start storages, and the like. Here, the CPU
The 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and so on. It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided, which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
Of the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is changed to a set value that serves as a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value that causes a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of values. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The set value change switch 151 detects the operation of the set value change button that forms the second operation unit of the operation units. The setting value change button is a push-type button, and the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the setting value change button is pressed.
If it is not pressed, it will be turned off.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is in the game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, and 1/28 for setting 5.
0, setting 6 is 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state,
The probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is the probability setting value display device 153.
However, the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and the probability set value is set to 1 to 1.
It is designed to be displayed as a number of 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed by using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.
In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In this embodiment, the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, and the probability setting value display device 15
3 and the like are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit. It is supposed to be a setting means that enables it. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signals of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability setting value in the game control device 100, or the setting sub-board side may change the probability setting value. The probability setting value is changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152.
The determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10.
It is also supplied from 0 to a test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). (Based signal), out ball detection switch signal (signal based on detection by the out switch that detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. A first input port 122 is provided.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
Not supplied to 124. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
The second solenoid for opening b is to output the opening / closing data of the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c.
An output port 134 is provided. Further, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information on the external information terminal plate 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 1 that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135.
38b, the third driver 138c, which outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 supply to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to be output to the external information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e for receiving display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying it on the status display device 160 are provided. ..

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
No. 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, the synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). Board effect device 4 provided
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling 4 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are the address / data bus 340.
It is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via. The glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and the movable effect member that operates forms a movable effect device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor or the like. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp, the motor, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32 (
The game is played by launching a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. And general winning opening 35
When a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning winning opening is controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3). It is discharged from the payout unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100
In 1A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, if the normal figure start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal figure start memory number is set. Add (+1) and store one normal figure start memory in ROM111B. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed.
In addition, the general figure display 53 is composed of a display device 41, and as ordinary identification information, for example, numbers, symbols, etc.
It is also possible to use a character symbol or the like, display it in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then stop and display it to display the result.

If the result of the solenoid variable display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that has a special result mode is displayed on the solenoid display 53 according to the type of hit. Along with displaying the stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and the decorative special figure start memory is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

Then, when the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 is in a state where the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, it is stored in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The jackpot determination random value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, the process of displaying the first special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when executing the second special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, the process of displaying the second special figure changing display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example,
Displaying a variable display of decorative special figures (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) Performs processing to display the game. In addition, the sub-game display unit of the sub-information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit in response to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol).
In each of the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU111A controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. To open 1
A round is set, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure change display game. Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 is in a time-saving state (specific game state, high probability state in normal drawing, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
Can be generated. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
That is, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 6.
When it becomes 00 msec and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500) of the first hit stop symbol
m seconds x 1 time), the opening time of the second stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of opening times (for example, 17)
00msec x 2 times), the opening time of the third stop symbol (opening time of the normal train) and the number of opening times (for example)
It is possible to set it to be 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map variation display game (
It is possible to control the normal fluctuation time) so that the second fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1).
352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is set to the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the second opening number of times to be larger than (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to set the probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Also,
The second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a memory of starting the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is designed to be executed (priority is executed). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36 is not particularly limited.
a, Start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, large winning port switch 38a, out switch for detecting all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. Uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which is provided with a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. There is. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and a predetermined register (step S3) is specified.
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step S4).
.. In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
The process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

The third input port 124 has a setting value change switch 151 and a setting key switch 1.
A signal from 52 and a signal from the main body frame open detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the set value change switch 151 at the time of power-on The state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an open / close detecting means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, the front frame 12 is left open.
When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, if the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, RA
The M111C is cleared (initialized). Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the front frame 12
Is required to be open.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from the power-on until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power is not accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem when the power is turned on. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). When the timer value is not 0 (step S)
12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step S).
12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the read-write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13), and off-data is output (output) to all output ports. (Set to the state where there is no) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16; Y).
, Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal
) (Step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on. When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S2).
1). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

In the case of the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is cut off during the probability setting value change state and the RAM data is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is set again. The value is changed. If the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), the main body frame (step S21; N) starts from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier.
The front frame 12) determines whether it is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability setting value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for displaying a state are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing the information of the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. Will be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In addition, the area for the initial value random number stores the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number which are updated at any time. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. Further, in the game control area, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored and a stack area are set. Further, in the work area for displaying the status, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying the base value, the accessory ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. The information to be displayed and necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of detected game balls in the outswitch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, during the jackpot state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information about the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information about the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number The area for game control will be cleared. The area for initial value random numbers and the area for variable pattern random numbers may not be included in the clear target. Further, the RAM clear start address 1 described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number Area, area for variable pattern random numbers, and area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 described later is the start address of the area for game control, and RA with this address set.
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control is cleared.

The status display area is initialized when it is abnormal in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set, the area for displaying the state may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the entire area of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. One or more of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, the area for the game control, and the area for displaying the state may be targeted. When targeting a plurality of areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be judged individually, or the checksums of each area may be added up to determine the validity. It is also possible to judge all at once.

When the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23).
). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), step S35
The process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. Further, when the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N),
When the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S24). To do.

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), step S30
And perform the processing when it recovers normally from the power failure. When the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the set value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It serves as an initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S).
16; N or step S17; N), when it is determined that the checksums do not match (
Step S19; N) proceeds to step S25 to perform initialization processing of all RAM areas. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and the third read first.
From the state of the input port 124, it is determined whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are used. Area, the area for variable pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

Further, when the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or when the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for instructing the setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). It is transmitted to (300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off. Production control device 30
At 0, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board effect device 44, the speaker 19a , 19b outputs a voice to notify the user to change the probability set value. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this case, if the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the front frame 12 is opened, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35.
The process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the gaming machine is turned off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the RAM data remains abnormal and the probability setting value cannot be changed to the changed state, so that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 may be used for notification, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be used to perform a display that is not used as identification information. Alternatively, a display device for notifying an abnormality may be provided.

As a process when the power is normally restored from the power failure, in step S30 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), steps S32 and S3
3 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Proceed to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability set value information which is the information of the selected probability set value, and the screen designation Send multiple commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command when waiting for customers, a recovery screen command in other cases). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value such as making the selection probability different.

The screen specification command sends a command according to the state of the restarted game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that provides recovery information is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the special figure variation display game to be restarted is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, when resuming the special game state interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 as the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed (step S).
35), the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process is migrated from step S21 or S23, the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control are used. The RAM area (work area and stack area) of is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is abnormal and migrated from step S27, RA
Since the M clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initially. The value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the area for the probability setting value. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent activity, the damage to the amusement store can be minimized. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, the information of the probability set value currently set in the probability set value display device 153 can be displayed.

Then, the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , Step S45. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90 based on the reception of the command for which the probability setting is being changed.
LED light emission of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, operation of board effect device 44, speaker 19
Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by outputting voice by a and 19b. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be made.

Further, as a process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 6, RA
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of this embodiment, in step S44,
Model specification command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, RAM initialization command (to display the customer waiting demo screen and to notify the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) Send multiple commands such as). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, the effect count information command and the high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value such as making the selection probability different.

In step S45, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs the process of starting the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the setting of the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is set by the CPU 111.
Performed by A. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number) ), Save in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining a hit symbol of a normal figure (step S47), and then allow an interrupt (step S48).
In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the game. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which the random number of the initial value of the winning symbol does not exist.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process in step S49.
Is set (step S50), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5).
1). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number update process (step S51; N)
Return to step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S49) (step S48), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S49, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
.. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S5).
2; N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S53).
), The process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S58) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after the process of step S28 is performed, step S26
Steps S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
The process of 8 may be repeated. That is, the control of the game may be stopped and the setting key switch may be turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124, not the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, step S2
If the state of repeating the processes 6 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, step S2
You may shift to 9 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state.
The open state of the front frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Further, the probability setting value change state may be entered only on the condition that the setting value change switch is in the ON state without providing the setting key switch. That is, steps S22 and S
If the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 without performing the process of step 23 (step S24; Y), the process may be shifted to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 6 for initializing the area for initial value random numbers, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for initial value random numbers, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control by ending without or by setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state in this way, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the control means stores stored contents even when the power is cut off. A storage means that can be held (RAM 111C) and a validity determination means (game control device 10) that determines whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on.
0) and an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value, and are stored in the storage means by the validity determination means. When it is determined that the information is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state. Also, R
When the AM111C is initialized, the information of the probability setting value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set. It is possible to prevent the store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the value is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, the game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means. When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means uses the specific information. This means that the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed based on the reception of. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the effect control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set by the initialization.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). The control means includes a setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)).
A storage means (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off is provided, and if the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is based on the information stored in the storage means. If the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on after recovery, the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If so, it means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability set value and the operation of selecting the initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the control means includes a legitimacy determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on, and is stored in the storage means by the legitimacy determination means. When it is determined that the information provided is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, a notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the first operation unit is operated. This means that a notification prompting the user to turn on the power is given. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are assigned to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change)). Necessary for controlling the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means including the information of the probability set values selected by the setting means. Storage means that can store information (RAM 11
1C), and the control means is configured to initialize the storage means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit is operated among the plurality of operation units. .. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt processing is
The periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is CPU1.
It is started by inputting to 11A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (a large winning opening solenoid 38b, a general electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S10) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.
5), the random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is performed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, and the winning port switch 3
5a, Winning port switch / status monitoring process (step) that monitors whether there is a normal signal input from the large winning port switch 38a and monitors errors (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.) S107) is performed.

Next, the probability setting value change process (step S1) for performing the process related to the change and confirmation of the probability set value.
08) is performed to determine whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S109). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) that outputs a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, specially The special figure game process (step S112) for performing the process related to the figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step S113) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, when the probability set value is changed (step S).
In the case of 109; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing related to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed.

In addition, in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the normal figure game process (step S113) should not be performed. However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, a process other than the above-described process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability setting value change state, the random number update process 1 (step S105) or the random number update process 2 (step S10).
6) may be omitted, and the random number may not be updated in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Monitoring process (step S1
16) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and a base value is obtained from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The status display edit output process is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line of (step S144) is acquired. In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is an output port for digit / external information output. 136
Is output to (step S146).

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, a plurality of light emitting display units provided in the batch display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (
For example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, "big hit signal 4" data, "symbol confirmation count signal" data, "start port signal" data. , "Main prize ball signal" data) and the launch permission output data (step S1)
50), the synthesized data is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / launch permission signal (step S151).

Next, the off-output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability set value display permission flag is the probability set value display device 15.
It is a flag set when the display regarding the probability setting value is permitted to 3.

When this probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y),
The probability set value display data is loaded from the probability set value display data area (step S154), and the probability set value display data is loaded.
The display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability set value (step S155). As a result, the probability set value display device 153 is displayed regarding the probability set value. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability set value display (step S155). In this case, the off-output data set in step S152 is set, and the probability set value display device 15
Nothing is displayed in 3.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability set value display data area. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value among the test signals to the test firing device, the display data of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. This simplifies the processing and makes it possible to output accurate information without changing the information of the probability set value. Of course, the display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S162), and if it is not in the ON state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and is a prize for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is divided into prize ball number counter areas (3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls in the case of this embodiment) set for each prize opening. Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning in the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted signals are sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three prize ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1 and 10
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively, and the 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area. Each of the ball counter areas is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, the winning number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the prize number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), step S
Return to 181 and repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S
The process proceeds to 192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and step S18.
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for turning on the payout busy signal (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, during the ball lending operation, during the shoot ball out error, during the overflow error, during the frame radio wave fraud, and the payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Number of prizes counter area 1
In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in (step S195), there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number. Is determined.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determine (step S197). With this judgment
When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure, and will be backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, conventional gaming machines require a backup function, so
There was a problem that it led to cost increase. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38).
A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the player, and a payout control means that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. (Payout control device 200), and the game control means is a prize ball based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, which is output from the payout control means. When a command is controlled to be transmitted to the payout control means and a power failure occurs and the payout control means recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the payout control means is immediately output. The prize ball command is issued in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means. It means that it is transmitted to the control means.

Further, in the game area 32, a winning area having a different number of prize balls (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 3)
7. A plurality of general winning openings 35 and special variable winning devices 38) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) has not yet transmitted a prize ball command instructing payout control of game balls for each number of prize balls. When the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying the above is provided, the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal is not transmitted to each prize ball command counter to specify whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It means that it is done before specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled in a comprehensive manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of the game ball in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38). The game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting the game ball, and the payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means.
The game control means is provided with a prize ball when the state signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area. External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs a prize ball signal) to the outside of the game machine.
The external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It becomes.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued by the payout control means (
It is configured to be transmitted to the payout control device 200), and is a prize ball command counter (game control device 10).
In 0), the information of the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the information is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and the prize ball command is given to the payout control means. By updating in correspondence with the transmission to, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be memorized, and the external information output means is decided to be paid out when the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area. The number of prize balls is accumulated, and each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, the prize ball signal is output to the outside of the game machine. The prize ball signal counter is set in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. The information of the prize can be stored, and it is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, and the cumulative processing is still performed by updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means. It will be possible to memorize the number of prize balls that have not been played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 1 game ball.
It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output every time the number becomes zero.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 for every 10 scheduled payouts (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the number of times of the updated (set) output.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the payout control device 200 transmits a prize ball signal every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows the winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
07) was shown. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the changed state (step S299). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S).
300). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processes after step S301 are performed as the processes related to the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the probability setting value is changed (
In the case of step S299; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed without processing related to winning.

In addition, in the case of the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal dynamic winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning opening is always available for winning. The winnings are not monitored, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the special variable winning device 38 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, a process other than the above-described process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
Information on the illegal winning error notification command, the upper limit of the number of illegal winnings (number of illegal winning judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. In addition, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches)
In addition, information on the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined for each switch. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is not open even though the large winning opening is not open. Fraud & detect normal prizes while monitoring for fraudulent prizes in the mouth
The winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the Fuden even though the Fuden is not open. At the same time, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch (for example, starting opening 1 switch 36a and winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step S30).
7), the winning number counter update process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. Status monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", status monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring status according to the value of the status scan counter is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the glass frame open detection switch 63
Status monitoring is set based on the signal output from, and the status scan counter value is "1".
If is, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), Game machine status check process to determine the status such as whether an error has occurred (step S)
316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to a disconnection of the switch connector or the like. 2 Signal-based condition monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows a probability set value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S401), and if it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability set value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability set value change process is terminated.

Further, in the case where the probability setting value is changed (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value extinguishing timer is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. .. When the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405.
In this case, the probability set value information is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. Further, when the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403;
N) proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed means that the probability setting value used in the game is newly set by performing the confirmation operation described later, and in this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination of whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether or not the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change button is pressed. When there is no input from the setting value change switch (
Step S406; N) proceeds to step S411.

When there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. In addition, when the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the probability setting value area for work is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is set to 6 here, it is possible to set the number to any other value.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes the information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the set value change button, the display of the probability set value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display is performed in which nothing is displayed, and then new probability set value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as a specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when displaying the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6,
A display other than this number may be used as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as a display of the probability set value. Further, when the display of the probability set value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability set value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the lapse of the specific display. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a blinking display mode, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from that in the non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the non-specific display. ..

Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and so on.
Specific notification, which is a notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed, may be performed by the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, and the like. That is,
Specific notification may be performed in combination with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the display device 41, the special figure 1 display 51, and the special figure 2 display may be displayed in the same manner as the probability set value display device 153.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (
Step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. When there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change process ends. When there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). This will
The selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirmation operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), the command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value change process is completed. .. The effect control device 300 receives the command for changing the probability set value, and is based on the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90.
The probability setting value has been changed by the display of the above, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of the sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (
Step S416; N), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value changing process is terminated. Further, when the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM
The clear start address 3 is set (step S417), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S418).
Step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variable pattern random numbers may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags in the area for the probability setting value, is cleared. To. Therefore, since the probability set value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability set value display device 153 ends. In addition, since the flag for changing the probability setting value is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and a command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. The effect control device 300 is based on receiving a command for changing the probability set value.
Display of display device 41 and sub-information display device 90, LED of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46
Due to the light emission, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the change of the probability set value is completed. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and notifying the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value such as making the selection probability different.

From the above, in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special game state that gives a game value to the player is generated when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. Probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to multiple types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from the above is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated due to the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display a display that is not used as a display of information on the probability set value as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means displays the updated information for a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows a probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the case of this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S).
433).

The term “during the game” means that the game corresponds to the execution of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the normal map variation display game, the special game state, or the hit state of the normal map. That is, it is a case where the state of the game is a prohibited state for prohibiting the start of the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, the effect control device 300 may be notified by transmitting information to the effect that the mode cannot shift to the probability set value confirmation mode because the game is being played.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. One or more states selected from the execution of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the normal figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the normal figure may be a condition, for example, the special figure. It may be in the game when it corresponds to either the execution of the variable display game or the special game state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Further, even if the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game detects the game balls, it is assumed that the game is in progress for a predetermined period, and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode that shifts after a certain period of time has passed without the game being played. This power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

When not in the game (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operation unit is operated to set the predetermined state (step S).
434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S4).
34; Y) sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (step S435) and sets the probability setting value display permission flag (step S436). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability set value currently set as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is displayed.

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437).
The command under confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. Further, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and produces a board effect based on receiving the command for confirming the probability set value. The operation of the device 44, the output of audio by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like are used to notify that the probability set value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. in this case,
The probability set value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. Then, a command for completing the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442).
, Ends the probability setting value confirmation process. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the command of the probability set value confirmation end.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and ends by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

As described above, by not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. , The fairness of the game can be ensured. In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If becomes, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not proceed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the condition is not limited to this, and the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. Anything that selects whether or not to do so will do. For example, in the case of a high probability state, it is possible not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be entered when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and generating a special gaming state that gives a gaming value to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is determined by operating the operation unit. Based on the state, it is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and the state of the game controlled by the control means is a prohibited state in which it is prohibited to start the confirmation state. In that case, even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the prohibited state is a state in which the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the prohibited state is a state in which a special gaming state is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and can generate the right to execute the game by winning, and the establishment of a predetermined condition. The hit state (normal figure hit state) in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result by executing the normal figure game (normal figure fluctuation display game) based on A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which the normal figure game is being executed or a hit state is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known during the progress of the game, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to the predetermined state in the state where the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state, and the prohibited state ends while the state is set to the predetermined state, the prohibited state is set. It will be in the confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, if the game does not progress, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game processing, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 3
Monitor the input of 7a, control the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and set the special figure display.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 forming the second starting winning opening 3
If there is a prize in the game ball in 7, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result based on the prize is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. Make a judgment.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
When it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A
9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. Special figure display processing (step A10) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, sets the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, etc.
)I do.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. Large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) for setting information necessary for the game
I do.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like.
16) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A).
19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special diagram 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , End the special figure game processing. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103).
In N), the process proceeds to the process of step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize for the first starting port (step A).
In 103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A1).
09), the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111)
; N) ends the start port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the second starting port (step A).
At 111; Y), an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
When it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y). , The process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
If it is determined in 112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature Fig. Performing the start port switch common process (step A115),
The start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, of the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37)
Set the non-winning information of the start port to be monitored (step A121), and start port 1 switch 3
Of 6a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure start port switch common processing, first, the start port 1 switch 36
Of a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the number of times the start port signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (step). A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (start memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the number of special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N)
) Ends the common processing for the special figure start port switch.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A13
6), save the target start opening winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A14).
2).
When it is determined in step A142 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A142).
In N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, in step A142, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), and the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed.
Special figure Start port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random value values that are memorized and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored.
It is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step A14) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process.
The details of 6) will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the start port winning flag saved in step A137 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and it is determined whether or not the first start port (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize. (Step A151).
When it is determined in step A151 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A151).
In N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, in step A151, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure holding time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A152, when it is determined that the special time is not shortened (step A152;
In N), it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
When it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A1)
53; Y) ends the special figure reservation information determination process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not being hit or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A158).
In (N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), and step A164
Move to the processing of.
On the other hand, in step A158, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 158; Y), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot is a small hit depending on whether or not the large hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A).
163), the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1)
62), the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 that are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing. That is, the determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Further, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (the game control device 100).
(For example, it is determined whether or not a special result is obtained). It should be noted that the time for determining the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start winning prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A3).
If it is determined as 05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and the effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), Special figure Ends normal processing. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command that forms the standby information is output to the effect control device 300.
It means that it is sent to.
On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309;
Y) shifts to the process of step A313 without performing the process of steps A310 to A312.

Further, in step A301, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step A302).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A303) is performed.
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
Further, in step A305, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step A306).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed.
Step A308) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321).
The jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with the deviation information and the jackpot information, and whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the missed hit flag and the small hit information for the small hit flag is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 323), the special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 1 (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 19A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second
The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 343), the special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 2 (step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
) And the details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state).
The lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value and the probability state. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process ends. Note that the loss in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in a later small hit determination process. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A3).
83; N) determines whether the state is in a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired (step A).
385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A38).
7). If the probability is not high (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit determination value to be acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process ends. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
) And the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is provided for each probability set value. Moreover, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. In addition, the range of the jackpot determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402).
). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the jackpot determination process ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the small hit determination process ends. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A405), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. , The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively specified in the judgment value table provided for each probability set value. Further, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, it depends on the probability setting value. And select the lower limit judgment value for small hits.

Further, the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381).
Or, in the process of setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), if the value indicating the referenced probability setting value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, The setting may be made assuming that it is a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or the game may be stopped and an error notification may be performed when an abnormality occurs. Further, although the probability setting value is referred to for each judgment of the big hit and each judgment of the small hit, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state. Or, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when determining a large hit or when determining a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure change processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the change symbol determination flag (special figure 1 change flag or special figure 2 change flag) is prepared (step A).
601), the effect command setting process is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command that forms the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In the production control device 300,
Upon receiving this symbol stop command, the variation display of the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is stopped and the result is stopped and displayed.

After that, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure is set as the process number (step A6).
05), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol) is saved. 2 (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the number of symbol confirmations related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is set in the signal control timer area. Save the value (eg 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and it is a jackpot (step A70).
5; If it is determined to be Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on,) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game is turned on.
(Turn on the signal per special symbol 2) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A705; N).
If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (step A706) (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory is turned on) regarding the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game. Turn on the signal during operation of the continuous operation device, turn on the signal per special symbol) RW
The process of saving in the test signal output data area of M (step A707) and setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Save to the upper limit area of the number of rounds of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is acquired.
Save to the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A71) is performed.
Perform 3). After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.
The fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is O when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1).
N, a big hit with no balls (so-called sudden big hit, etc. The big winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1
), It turns ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and turns OFF otherwise.
Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability that the winning result will be obtained in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game.
0 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. Save the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72)
3). After that, fanfare / fanfare for shifting to intra-interval processing /
Interval processing Transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It serves as a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A706).
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72).
In 5; Y), the high-probability fluctuation number update process (step) for updating the value (high-probability fluctuation number) of the high-probability fluctuation number region for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. A
726), effect mode information check process related to effect mode setting (step A727)
To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A).
728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is not high (step A728; N).
In), load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area and prepare (step A).
729), the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and an effect command setting process (step A73) is prepared.
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Further, in step A728, when it is determined that the special figure is in high probability (step A72).
8; Y) proceeds to the process of step A733. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening opens due to the occurrence of a small hit, but in order to prevent the player from being aware of the occurrence of a small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" related to the processing during the small hit fanfare is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (big hit + small hit output). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A)
737), a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. High-probability fluctuation count update process (step A743) for updating the area value (high-probability fluctuation count), effect mode information check process for setting the effect mode (step A7)
44) is performed, and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A7).
45), it is determined whether the remaining rotation speed of the effect and the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation match (step A7).
46). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for switching preparation do not match (step A746; N), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A749). ), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752).
), Ends the processing while displaying the special figure.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speed for the switching preparation match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to the process of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the look-ahead effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game processing (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the normal figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and the effect setting of the normal figure change display game, and the normal figure change are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process (step) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53. B15) is performed to end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14, and subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301; Y). )
Sets "0" for the normal processing of the normal figure as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing of the normal figure is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) of the RWM. The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is It is determined whether the normal probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) is higher than the high probability of the normal figure, that is, the time saving state (step B303).

When the normal figure is not in the high probability (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the normal figure low probability is set (step B304), and when the normal figure is in the high probability (step B).
303; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (Step B).
307).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B3).
07; Y) saves the loss information in the hit flag area (step B308), sets the loss stop symbol number (step B309), and saves the loss symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310). , The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B).
311), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B313). ), The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit probability at the low probability of the normal figure is 0/251, the hit probability at the high probability of the normal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low in the normal figure, the value of the hit random number is deviated in all cases of "0" to "250". In addition, at the time of high probability of normal drawing, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the hit random number is "0" is out of the question.
Further, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After saving the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the free area after the shift is set to 0.
Clear (step B317) and update the number of reserved figures by -1 (step B318). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done.
Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B3).
20). Then, the normal map changing process transition setting process (step B321) for shifting to the normal figure changing process is performed, and the normal figure normal process is terminated. That is, the game execution means in which the game control device 100 executes the normal map variation display game as the variable display game (based on the normal map start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal map start gate 34 (inflow region). Make.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the normal map changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the normal map display process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 53, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of the normal map ends. The signal (for example, the signal during fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the signal is saved.
The stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B405), and the normal map fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), "0" related to the normal processing of the normal figure is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B516). After that, the fraudulent monitoring period flag is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal map display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). Or "5") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (
For example, "4" or "7") is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per normal figure (step B506). Next, the normal power opening time (for example, 1700 m) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information
Acquire seconds or 2600 msec) and save it in the normal map game processing timer area (step B5).
07).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during normal drawing (step B).
508), the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area (step B509).
After that, a signal related to the start of hitting the normal figure fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the middle signal per normal symbol) and a signal related to starting the normal electric operation (for example, turning on the signal during normal electric accessory 1 operation) are tested signals. In order to save in the output data area (step B510) and output the signal for driving (on) the normal electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B511).

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B513). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N).
) Updates the per-figure control pointer by +1 (step B603), and performs branch processing according to the value of the per-figure control pointer (the value before the +1 update in step B603) (step B604).
In addition, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y).
Does not perform the process of updating the per-figure control pointer area by +1 in step B603, but performs the branch process according to the value of the per-figure control pointer (step B604).

When the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is used. The wait time after the blockage of 37 is saved in the normal diagram game processing timer area (step B605), and the off data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area (step B606) in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c. End the process during drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B607), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B608). Ends the processing during the normal drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled.
Save the open time of the normal electric power, which is the open time of
9) In order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B610), and the normal processing is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B614), and the normal processing during hitting the normal figure is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, the wait time is 300 m.
Seconds are 1700 msec as the normal power release time in step B607, 2600 msec as the normal power release time in step B609, and 6 as the normal power remaining ball processing time in step B613.
Save 00ms.
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec elapses, the normal power release time is "1700 msec", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is "0", so the wait is 300 msec. The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "1", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is set to "2".
The wait time of 300 msec is set because it is updated to, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is set to "4". , So that the remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "2600 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "2600 msec", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "5", the weight of 300 msec is waited. The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "6", so the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "7", so it is 600 msec. The normal electric remaining ball processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a normal figure game (normal figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result, the normal variation winning device 37 is opened. It serves as a control means for a normal variable winning device that can generate a hit state to be converted (normal figure hit state).

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111)
, Winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
115), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116), create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device, and set it in the output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
When a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved. It is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 ( Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move to the processing of. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. ..

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S81).
2; Y), when the fraudulent electric service is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the fraudulent winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is output as external information. Saved in the data area (step S817), saved the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step S818), and step S819.
Move to the processing of. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), and frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N).
, When the fraudulent electric train is not occurring (step S813; N) and the fraudulent prize opening is not occurring (step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
When a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If a switch error is not occurring (step S815).
In N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
)I do.
Next, if the symbol confirmation number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution number of the special figure variation display game is not "0", the number is updated by -1 (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 32 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
The hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect is performed. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is used to create a system cycle (1/30 second per frame).
When 0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 are performed. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed and the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed.
The process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (1/30 second).
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in the step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). C2
34; N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y) is performed.
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C239, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol command (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of one-shot commands such as a hold number command and an error command (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of one-shot commands (step C24).
In 1; Y), a one-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of one-shot commands (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol-based command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (step C2)
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of winning a start. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, commands related to power-on and commands related to probability setting values are processed by single-shot command processing. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for power failure recovery and commands for RAM initialization. Examples of commands related to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the probability setting change, checking the probability setting value, and ending checking the probability setting value.

In the above first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of, the probability setting value may be changed. However, since the RAM is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, either during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, during the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, during the special game state, or during the normal figure hit state. It may be a condition that it does not correspond to. Further, it may be a condition that the customer is in a waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

In addition, it was decided that the RAM 111C would be initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, but RA
The initialization of the RAM 111C may not be performed except when it is determined that the data of the M111C is abnormal.

Further, although the probability values corresponding to each probability setting value are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability setting value in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes a value of 0 to 5. The same applies to the working probability setting value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 is displayed in 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of settings 1 to 3 are assigned as settings 4 to 6. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch the probability value in three stages. Other than this, it is the same as in FIG. 35 (a). By doing so, when the six-step probability value is unnecessary, only the probability value needs to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

It should be noted that which probability value is assigned to which probability setting value is free, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value change button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. It becomes the order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, the change stage can be set to 4 stages, and can be set to any stage of 1 to 6 stages.

FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, FIG. 35 (b)
In the setting 4 to setting 6, the setting 1 to the setting 3 are set, and the probability setting value display device 153 is set.
The display in is also set to 1 to 3 corresponding to this. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value come to correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easier for the person in charge of the work to grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set only one probability value substantially, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, the same display is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 even if the setting value change button is operated, but the operation can be performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It becomes easier for workers to understand that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is set to 6, any number other than this may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35 (d), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be one. Further, in order to make it possible to set a larger number of steps, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more. Further, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, but the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed in response to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The jackpot probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, if only the big hit and the small hit are to be made as a result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hit according to the probability value of the big hit. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of winning the normal map variation display game may be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. This setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion with the setting sub-board of the game control device 100. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and it is possible to reduce the cost. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, an operation probability M may be provided for each probability set value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the gaming control device 100 transmits a command for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modification includes a storage means capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. In this way, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, the main process shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the payout instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). Payout control device 2
At 00, based on receiving the command of this payout instruction, payout is started based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being impaired. it can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification prompting the change of the probability setting value, the notification that the payout may be performed is also performed. You may. Further, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200 not only in the above case, but for example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. 6 to the effect control device 300 (step). S40) and when the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout control device 20 is also used.
You may send the command (specific information) of the payout instruction to 0.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned. A setting means (setting means) that enables the selected probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The payout control means (payout control device 20) that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information from the game control device 100) and the game control means.
0), and the game control means is a storage means (R) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off.
AM111C), the validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the above, and is specified when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. The information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, the effect control means gives a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value based on the reception of the specific information, and the payout control means is the power supply. It is provided with a payout information storage means that can retain the stored contents even in the blocked state and can store the payout information received from the game control means, and when specific information is received, the game medium is based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. It means that the control to pay out is performed.
Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example is prepared with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not the condition for determining the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Confirmed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end waiting flag (step S45).
7), the process of steps S421 to S415 is performed to end the confirmation condition monitoring process.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first definite condition on condition of the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition as described later. Here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition is satisfied with the input from the touch switch. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor the end wait flag, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not there is an end waiting flag (step S451).
). If there is an end waiting flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, the monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end wait flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. When the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3) is set in the change end timer area.
Save seconds) (step S453) and set the end wait flag (step S454)
).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, the change is updated by -1 (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process ends. When the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processes after step S457 are performed, and the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second confirmation condition is satisfied and the selected probability setting value is set when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch that performs the second operation is performed. It has become so.

As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected by satisfying either the first confirmation condition or the second confirmation condition is set as the probability setting value used in the game.
Until these definite conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, if the power supply is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value change state, the operation handle 24 may be touched to notify that the selected probability setting value is set. This notification may be always performed in the state where the probability set value is changed, or may be performed only in the state where the end wait flag is set. Further, the first definite condition and the second definite condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second confirmation condition may be set only when the setting key switch is turned off. Further, a probability setting value selected by preparing three or more definite conditions and satisfying any of them may be set.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, if the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability setting value change state, and the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value, but for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is among a plurality of confirmation conditions. It means that the selected probability setting value is set based on the fact that either of them is satisfied. Therefore, the probability setting value can be changed without fail. Further, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

In addition, if the power is cut off before any of the multiple confirmation conditions is satisfied, the setting means will be used.
This means that the selected probability setting value is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of definite conditions include a first definite condition and a second definite condition, the first definite condition is that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second definite condition is the first operation. Is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be changed without fail.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not have a setting key operation unit as a setting means and does not have a setting key switch 152. In addition, the transition conditions to the changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the main process shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the backed up information is normal and the probability set value is not changed (step S21; N), is the set value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier? Is determined (step S61).

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 of FIG. 6 in order to perform processing when the power is normally restored from the power failure. Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the flag for changing the probability set value is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the figure is shown in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of step 6. In this modified example, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. Further, when the flag for changing the probability setting value is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N).
Goes to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is not normal, the RAM clear start address 1
(Step S25), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), the setting change instruction command (specific information)
Is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as in step S62.
When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y),
The process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62, S65) in the above-mentioned main process. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modification, the staff can shift to the probability set value change state by inserting the game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is provided. From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether or not this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y),
The probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process is terminated. As a result, the state shifts to the probability setting value change state.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). Then, when the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process ends. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, step S of FIG. 6 is performed to initialize the RAM area for game control.
If the data is transferred to 41 and the backed up data is abnormal, step S
The processing of 28 and S29 is performed and the control is stopped.

The transition conditions may or may not be changed at the amusement store. Further, although the transition condition is set to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be a transition condition. In this case, it may be a condition that only the detection by the detection means has been detected, or it may be a predetermined condition that the detection means has detected a plurality of times in a predetermined mode (detection number of times, detection interval, etc.). ..

Further, although the detection sensor in the winning region is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 and the set value change switch 151 may be used. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection means that the player cannot freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, the keyboard may be provided at a position where the keyboard can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened and used as a detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by the password input from the keyboard. ..

Further, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability setting value changing state is made possible, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, the establishment of the transition condition may be monitored to enable the transition to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on. The period for monitoring the establishment of the above may be started.

From the above, in a game, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives the player a game value when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. Detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a,
Starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is a mode predetermined by the detection means. When is detected, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means functions in the same manner as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally.
In addition, the number of gaming machines that can change the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, it is used in a game in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a game value to a player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). In addition, the setting means makes it possible to select a probability setting value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means functions in the same manner as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can change the probability setting value at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode within a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

In addition, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability set value is changed by the set value change operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch forming the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and the input state is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value of the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Will be.

By using the DIP switch in this way, the work of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance, the probability set value display device 153
May not be provided. Further, a cover covering the DIP switch may be attached so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch and turned on when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be turned on all the time, or may be turned on only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

In addition, the setting value changing operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, and any switch can be used as long as the probability setting value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Also, depending on the state of the setting key switch 152, the probability setting value is changed.
As in the third modification described above, the probability set value change state may be changed depending on the state of the set value change switch 151, and the probability set value change state may be terminated after a predetermined time elapses. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started.
In addition, it may be performed regularly at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, the notification that an abnormality has occurred may be given, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example has a setting key switch 152 and a CP for enabling the change of the probability setting value.
If the wiring to and from the U111A is broken, the game cannot be played.

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become like. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154.
Is connected to. The setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the probability set value is not changed and the game can proceed. Further, the gaming machine of this modified example is provided with an LED that serves as a confirmation means that makes it possible to visually recognize the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, the probability setting value is changed on the condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information input based on the fact that the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, and is based on the input of the specific operation information. The probability setting value is changed so that the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot proceed, and by ending the probability set value change state, the game can proceed.

FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. CPU in either case
The input to the 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability setting value can be changed, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability set value is changed and the game cannot proceed. In this way, by making it possible to input specific operation information even when the wire is broken or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding when it is abnormal.
Further, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 here, they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Further, the game control device 10 is a setting sub-board that serves as a setting means including a setting key switch 152 and the like.
Although it is said that the game control device 100 is provided separately from 0, the game control device 100 may be provided with a setting key switch 152 or the like so that the setting means may be integrated with the game control device 100. In this case as well, the setting means may be set by the same configuration. It is possible to detect a disconnection between the key switch 152 and the CPU 111A or a disconnection of the connector.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be entered. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value connected to the control means and assigned the probability value used for the lottery of the game are set by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not proceed with the game when the specific operation information is input. If the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability set value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[6th modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the game is in progress (step S433; Y).
), The off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434;
N) sets the off state confirmation flag (step S473), and ends the probability set value confirmation process. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472).
The processing after step S435 is performed, and the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, when there is no off state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, if the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the setting key switch is turned off when the game is not in progress. When it changes to the on state, it shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on during the game, it is intended during the game in which the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered. If the setting key switch is turned on without doing so, it can be prevented that the game is not in progress (not prohibited), the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the probability setting value is displayed. .. That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) is a control means (game control device 100).
The operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key operation unit)) when the game state controlled by) is not in the prohibited state
The confirmation state is set only when the state of the setting key switch 152)) is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being unintentionally shown.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example includes a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit, a setting value change button forming the second operation unit, and a RAM clear button as the third operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. Further, the RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, the process proceeds to step S41 when the RAM clear switch is on (the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y). That is,
The RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. In this probability setting value change process, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed to determine the selected probability set value. Do.

In this way, by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button, the RAM 111
Since C can be initialized and the probability setting value can be confirmed by this RAM clear button, the RAM initialization and the probability setting value determination work can be selected by using the minimum operation unit. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the amusement store. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

In addition, when the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to only initialize the RAM without shifting to the state, it may be necessary to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state when only the RAM is to be initialized. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the amusement shop.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM.
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) of the clear buttons (RAM clear switch) is operated. In addition, it is possible to initialize the storage means (RAM111C). Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be determined.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit.
Setting means (game control device) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit (set value change button (set value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)). 100), a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game by the control means including information of the probability set value selected by the setting means, and a closed state covering the front surface of the game machine 10. The main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted into an open state and an open / close detecting means (game control device 100) that can detect the open / closed state of the main body frame are provided, and the control means is in the open state of the main body frame. If there is, if it is detected by the open / close detection means and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit is operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the open / close detection means detects that the main body frame is open and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation unit is operated, the probability setting value can be changed. It means that the storage means is initialized without making it in such a state. Therefore, when it is desired to only initialize the RAM, it is not necessary to change the probability set value, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

Further, the control means is detected by the open / close detecting means when the main body frame is in the open state, and the first
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and the main body frame is closed. If the open / close detection means detects the state and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the probability set value can be changed. It means that the storage means is initialized without doing so. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, the probability set value can be changed, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, it does not shift to the probability set value change state, so that fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In FIG. 45, by performing the state of the setting key switch before confirming the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value is changed. However, the setting key switch is on and the RAM
The fact that the clear switch is on may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.
By making the operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value change state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment not provided with the RAM clear button, it is detected by the open / close detection means that the main body frame is in the open state, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and when the main body frame is closed, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and , When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without making the probability setting value changeable. It can be said that. In this case as well, the fact that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be exchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing after step S407 is performed, the selected probability setting value is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing after step S412 is performed. , The process of determining the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[8th modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification differs in the operation of confirming the probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, when the set value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processes after step S407 are performed to change the selected probability set value. Further, when the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed, and the process for determining the selected probability set value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time, and there is a first input mode when the pressing is completed. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is changed when the set value change button is released (when the set value change switch 151 is changed to the off state) in a short pressing operation. The reason why the setting value change button is released is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed in a predetermined time or longer, and there is a second input mode when the specified time elapses. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is fixed when the pressing operation is performed for a long time exceeding the specified time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while pressing the setting value change button. The work of changing, confirming, and clearing the RAM of the set value can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.
Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. The first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-mentioned operations, and may be any operation as long as they can be discriminated from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value changing button (setting value changing switch 151)). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM1)
11C) can be initialized, and by operating a predetermined operation unit,
The selected probability setting value can be determined.

[9th modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N).
), It is determined whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is ended and the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode.

The predetermined abnormality can be set arbitrarily, but here, it is a magnet fraud, a panel radio wave fraud, a frame radio wave fraud, a general electric wave fraud, and a big prize opening fraud. If any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent activity, and by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when such anomalies occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball breakage error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of the connector disconnection or the like are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but these may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened to operate the setting key operation unit and the set value change button, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, so that the game store side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known until the person in charge confirms the notification of the occurrence of this abnormality.

It should be noted that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started to prompt the confirmation of the gaming machine. In a device external to the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal beyond the predetermined time.

In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the setting key switch is turned on. If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the state is on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, the probability setting value confirmation mode is shifted only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can do it. In this case, the off state confirmation flag is cleared when the game is in progress (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y).

In this way, by preventing the transition from the probability setting value confirmation mode to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on from the state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it is prohibited to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on while a predetermined abnormality is occurring, the probability setting value is changed to a state in which all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved (a state that is not a prohibited state). It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, the probability set value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is determined by operating the operation unit. It is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed based on the state, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred. Means that even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, it is not in the confirmation state.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine, and when any of the predetermined abnormalities occurs, the predetermined abnormality is found. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all the information is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to notify the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is shown. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by this.

Further, a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game is provided, and the control means stores specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and the confirmation state is started. It means that it is output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, in the setting means, the operation unit is set to a predetermined state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred.
If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, the confirmation state is set based on the fact that all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved. Therefore, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when a predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, the setting means is set to the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being unintentionally shown.

[10th modification]
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (
In step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not in progress (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S).
512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is interrupted during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, after performing the process of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability set value confirmation process ends. Further, when there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, when the game is interrupted, the game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be resumed.

In the state where the game is interrupted, the display of the batch display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, if the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variable display game or the normal map variable display game, the variable display on the batch display device 50 may be continued. Further, the batch display device 50 may be displayed to indicate that it is in a suspended state.

Further, when the game is interrupted, the interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is resumed, the resume command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the display device 41, the sound, the LED, etc. A light emitting member or a movable accessory may be used to produce an effect corresponding to the interruption. Further, the display on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored.

Further, even when the game is interrupted, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the general winning opening 3
5 and the special variable winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Also,
Even if the game is interrupted, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

[11th modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is designed to output a sound accompanying a change in the probability set value.

FIG. 50A shows an example of changing the probability set value. When the power of the gaming machine is off, turn the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position to turn on the setting key switch (t11), and turn on the power of the gaming machine in this state. The value is changed (t12). The game control device 100 transmits a command for which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300 based on the set value change state, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is changed based on the reception of this command. Outputs a notification voice during change. The changing notification voice may be any voice, and examples thereof include a voice saying "probability setting value is being changed" and a specific music or alarm sound. In addition, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 also notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "The probability setting value is being changed". That is, the effect device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. By performing the notification using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is in the changed state, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the clerk of the amusement store and the surroundings It can be noticed by the player and can prevent an illegal game from being performed.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to turn off the setting key switch, the probability setting value changing state ends (t13). Based on the end of the set value change state, the game control device 100 issues a command to end the probability setting change to the effect control device 300.
The effect control device 300 outputs the probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information of the probability setting value set over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command (t13 to t14). After that, the sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

The probability set value notification voice may be any voice, and for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), a voice corresponding to the set probability set value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the voice "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, it may be a voice other than this, or it may be a specific music or an alarm sound. Further, the display device 41 also displays according to the probability setting value set in the same manner. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "The probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, the display may be other than this.

In addition to this, the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are notified as corresponding to the set probability setting value. You may do so. That is, the probability set value is notified by using the effect device used in the game. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the clerk of the game store or the surrounding games. A person can be aware of it, and it is possible to prevent an illegal game from being performed.

In addition, when the probability setting value is changed, the external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) can grasp that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Also, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, the external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing so, the game store can immediately grasp the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability set value change state. Further, the probability set value notification voice may be output during the period during which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally. Further, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, and the board decoration device 4 indicate that the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.
6. The notification may be made by an effect device such as the board effect device 44.

Further, each time the probability setting value is updated by the operation in the probability setting value change state, the sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. Further, the other effect device may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

From the above, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value when the game is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition and the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. A control means (game control device 100) for controlling and a setting means (game control) capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit. Device 100) and a production device (speaker 19a) that produces a game.
, 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board effect device 44), and the selected probability set value can be notified by the effect device. .. Therefore, fraudulent activity can be prevented. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the end of the probability set value change state, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally.

As described above, in the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and receives a large winning prize. Control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the mouth. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, during the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state, either a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. A round game that opens the big prize opening is executed a predetermined number of times until the above conditions are met.
51 to 61 show a flowchart for explaining the process of generating the special gaming state and the small hit gaming state.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
The details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the large winning opening opening processing is in progress (step A20).
1).
If the process is in progress while the large winning opening is open (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (step A202).

If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A202; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether the processing is being performed during the small hit (step A202; N).
Step A203).
If the small hit middle process is in progress (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204).
Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0",
In this way, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number.

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to the processing of step A205.
In step A205, "0" is set in the winning counter (step A205). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 1 (one of the two large winning opening switches 38a) (step A206).

When there is no input in the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the big winning opening switch 2 (the other of the two big winning opening switches 38a) (step A210). If there is an input to the large winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y),
The grand prize opening count command is prepared (step A207), and the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 2 (the other of the two large winning opening switches 38a) (step A210).

When there is no input to the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). If there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), prepare a large winning opening count command (step A2).
11), the effect command setting process (step A212) is performed. And the winning counter is +
Update 1 (step A213) and determine whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A).
214).

When the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214;
N) determines whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is completed. It is determined whether it is inside (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is won a large prize. It is added to the number of mouth counts (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of large winning mouth counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "10") (step A218).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219).
), The special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A220), and it is determined whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221).
When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area is hit. The value at the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 52, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). , Production command setting process (step A)
903) is performed.

Next, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the short open (step A906; Y)
The large winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for the second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A907), and the process proceeds to step A909. When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. Save (
Step A908), the process proceeds to step A909.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the big winning opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern, the big winning opening opening information 1 (4R: all short opening), the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening), and the big winning Mouth opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), large winning opening opening information 4 (4R: all long opening), large winning opening opening information 5 (16R: all long opening), Large winning opening opening information 6 (16R: 1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), large winning opening opening information 7 (16)
R: 1 to 4R is set to long opening, and 5 to 16R is set to short opening).
Therefore, in the large winning opening operation judgment table, the large winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching judgment value "0" are displayed, and the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching judgment value "16" are displayed in the large winning opening opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16". , The large winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value "8" are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value "4". Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

In step A909, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing while the large winning opening is open (step A909). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A910).
Next, a signal regarding the start of opening the large winning opening (for example, a signal indicating that the special electric accessory 1 is operating is turned on.
) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A911), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A912). After that, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A913), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 53, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001).

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the special gaming state is obtained. It is determined whether the number of rounds of the above is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). Prepare an interval command for the interval between rounds (
Step A1007) and the effect command setting process (step A1010) are performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011. If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011.

On the other hand, in the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008).
Prepare the ending command related to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state (step A1009), and perform the effect command setting process (step A101).
0) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1011.

In step A1011, the processing number is set to "5" related to the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening (
Step A1011). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (
Step A1012). After that, in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the off data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1013), and the large winning opening is opened. End the intermediate processing.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 54, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

When the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101)
In (N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1103), and the normal interval time (for example, 0.1) is obtained. Seconds) (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A).
In 1105; Y), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect that notifies that the subsequent rounds will be short-open rounds. Specifically, as the big winning opening opening information showing the big hit pattern, the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and the big winning opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R are long opening, 5 to 16R are long opening). When any of (short open) is selected, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the jackpot round, and the round continuous notification effect is executed at the 4th round. If the selected large winning opening opening information is the large winning opening opening information 2, it is notified that the long opening will continue in the round continuation notification production, and the large winning opening will be opened with the long opening even in the 5th and subsequent rounds. To. In addition, if the selected large winning opening opening information is the large winning opening opening information 3, it is notified that the rank-down effect will be performed in the round continuous notification effect and the short opening will be performed, and the large prize will be won in the 5th and subsequent rounds. The mouth is opened with a short opening.

If the large winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, when the number of rounds is the value of the special production round (
Step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank-down effect is set (step A1108), and step A
The process proceeds to 1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one type, for example, 2R and 4R.
A plurality of types such as 8R and 8R may be provided.

In step A1109, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109). After that, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A11).
10), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1111), and a signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1112), and the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1).
101; Y) loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1113) that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived, and the loaded flag, the large winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern. Set the ending time corresponding to (step A11)
14), the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1115).

Next, "6" is set as the processing number related to the jackpot end processing (step A1116).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1117), and a signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is sent. Save in the test signal output data area (step A1118).
Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1119), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1120). , Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A1121). After that, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A11).
22), the information in the large winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared (step A1123), and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is completed.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 55, in the jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202), and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed.
The jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203).

Next, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).
Next, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1206), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM is acquired. It is saved in the area (step A1207), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and is saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1208).

Next, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209).
, Save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1).
210), the effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed.
Next, a production rotation speed command corresponding to the production remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A121).
2), the effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed, the high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), and the effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed.
Next, after the jackpot is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a time reduction (step A1216), and if there is a time reduction (step A1216; Y), the process proceeds to step A1219. If there is no time reduction (step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1218),
The process proceeds to step A1219.

In step A1219, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (step A1219). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1220).
Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, the jackpot 1 signal is turned off, the jackpot 3 signal is turned off, and the jackpot 4 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1).
221), signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is OF.
F) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).
Next, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1223), and the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A12).
24), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1225). afterwards,
The information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1226), the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1227), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1).
231), signal related to start with high probability & no time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation The time shortened state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( Step A1232).

Next, a number without a time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step A1233), and the number is saved.
Save the Fuzu low probability & no time saving flag in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A1)
234), save the special figure high probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (step A1236).
Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1237), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. In order to turn off the lights, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1238), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state (probability change state) and is not a time saving state. Further, by setting the initial value (for example, 100) in the high probability fluctuation number region, the high probability state ends by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 56B, in the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A).
1241). Since the signal related to the start of the time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.
Next, the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on.
, Special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state The signal is turned on, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1242).

Next, a number with a time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step A1243), and the number is saved.
Save the flag with high probability and short time in the normal map game mode flag area (step A1)
244), save the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1245). After that, the initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (step A1246), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state (probability change state) and a time saving state. Further, by setting the initial value (for example, 100) in the high probability fluctuation number region, the high probability state ends by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).
In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the special game state, the right-handed setting is not performed in the jackpot end setting process 2.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game process.
The details of.
As shown in FIG. 57, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, first, “8” related to the small hit middle processing is set as the processing number (step A1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1302).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1303), and a signal regarding the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1) is saved. The operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1304).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1305). After that, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1306), and the initial small hit operation value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area. (Step A1307), the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the small hit medium processing, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit operation transition setting process is performed. End the hit processing.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high probability of special figure. Determine if the flag is for (step A1406)
). In this way, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time is shortened.
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y)
), The process proceeds to step A1409. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. The process proceeds to step A1409.

In step A1409, "9" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1409). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1410). After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1411), the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1412), and the small hit is saved. End the hit processing.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit medium process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59, in the small hit operation transition setting process, branch processing (step A1421) is performed according to the control pointer (small hit medium control pointer).

When the control pointers are "0", "2", and "4" in step A1421, the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1422). The off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1423), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.
Further, in step A1421, when the control pointers are "1", "3", and "5", the large winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1424), the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1425), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after a small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, 200 m
The opening of seconds and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit medium control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of opening and the end of closing.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "0" and 1 At the end of the first 1500 msec closure (ie, 2 from the first 1500 msec closure)
The control pointer during small hit is updated to "1" at the time of switching to 200msec opening for the second time.
At the end of the second 200msec opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "2", and at the end of the second 1500msec closing, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "3", and the third 200m.
The small hit medium control pointer is updated to "4" at the end of m second opening, and the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 msec closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to "6", and after the elapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 msec, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec, it is closed for 2000 msec, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 60, in the small hit remaining ball processing, first, “10” related to the small hit end processing is set as the processing number (step A1501), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1502).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1503), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). To the test signal output data area (step A1504)
). After that, the information in the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A1505), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 is cleared) (step A1506), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y)
) Moves to the process of step A1619. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and it is set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set). Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information (step A1604).

Next, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1605), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609).
When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

On the other hand, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610). Production command setting process (step A1611)
)I do.
Next, a production rotation speed command corresponding to the production remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A161).
2), the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed, the high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and the effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616).
), If the mode is not left-handed (step A1616; N), step A1619
Move to the processing of. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and the effect command setting process (step A1617) is prepared.
After performing step A1618), the process proceeds to step A1619.

In step A1619, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (
Step A1619). Then, it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time reduction (in the time reduction state) (step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special time reduction (step A1620; Y)
The process proceeds to step A1623. If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special time reduction (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step). A1
621), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622).
The process proceeds to step A1623.

In step A1623, “0”, which is normally processed in the special figure, is set as the processing number (step A1623). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1624). After that, a signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, one big hit signal is OF
F) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1625), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1626).
Next, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1627), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1628), and the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1629). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1630), and the small hit end process is completed.

<Over winning notification production>
When an over-winning to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) occurs during the special gaming state, the gaming machine 10 can execute an over-winning notification effect for notifying the occurrence of the over-winning. Here, the case where the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs is the case where the number of game balls winning into the large winning opening during one round game exceeds the maximum number of winnings (for example, 10).
In the over-winning notification effect of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the first notification mode (
There are an over prize notification effect of the first effect mode), an over prize notification effect of the second notification mode (second effect mode), and an over prize notification effect of the third notification mode (third effect mode).

The over-winning notification effect of the first notification mode can notify (suggest) the occurrence of over-winning. In the present embodiment, there are two types of the first notification mode, type 1 and type 2, but of course, the type of the first notification mode is not limited to two types. That is, the type of the first notification mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
The over-winning notification effect of the second notification mode can notify (suggest) the occurrence of over-winning, and also notify (suggest) the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a special result as a look-ahead notice. In the present embodiment, there are four types of the second notification mode, types 1 to 4, but of course, the types of the second notification mode are not limited to the four types. That is, the type of the second notification mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
The over-winning notification effect of the third notification mode can notify (suggest) the occurrence of over-winning and also notify (suggest) the currently set probability setting value. In the present embodiment, there are four types of the third notification mode, types 1 to 4, but of course, the types of the third notification mode are not limited to the four types. That is, the type of the third notification mode may be one type or a plurality of types.

FIG. 63 shows an example of processing related to the over-winning notification effect.
The effect control device 300 executes the decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41, and depending on the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game, the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed. indicate.
During execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, the display device 41 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), a decorative special figure variation display game display unit 41a for displaying the decorative special figure variation display game, and an undigested display device 41. Decorative special figure corresponding to the first start memory The first waiting hold display unit 41b for displaying the start memory display
1 and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested second start memory The second waiting hold display unit 41b2 for displaying the display, and the start memory during digestion (corresponding to the special figure change display game currently being executed). The running hold display unit 41c that displays information related to (starting memory) and the decorative special symbol variable display game display unit 41a variablely display small symbols that are relatively smaller than the decorative special symbol (identification information) that is displayed variable. A variable display unit 41d for small symbols and a number holding display unit 41e for displaying the number of undigested start memories numerically are provided.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 63A, when the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300 starts the special gaming state. Notification mode With reference to the distribution table, the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect to be executed during the special game state is determined based on the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game. afterwards,
The type of the notification mode is determined by referring to the type distribution table corresponding to the determined notification mode.

An example of the notification mode distribution table is shown in FIG. 64A. In the notification mode distribution table, a notification mode for the over-winning notification effect is set for each result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
Here, in the present embodiment, there are 12 types of decorative special symbols, symbols 1 to 9 having a number portion as a symbol identification portion, and symbols A to C having a character portion as a symbol identification portion. In the variable display game, symbols 1 to 9 and symbols A to C are variablely displayed in a predetermined order in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 41a. In addition, the special result mode (big hit result mode) of the decorative special figure variation display game includes a general symbol (
There are a special result mode consisting of doublets of symbols 1 to 9) and a special result mode consisting of doublets of special symbols (designs A to C).

In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is doublet with an even number pattern (“2”.
, 2, 2 ”,“ 4, 4, 4 ”,“ 6, 6, 6 ”,“ 8, 8, 8 ”), the special gaming state based on the special result mode The first notification mode is selected as the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect to be executed during. Further, when the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is a special result mode consisting of doublet numbers (“7,7,7”) of the symbol 7, the second notification mode is selected, and the decoration special figure variation display game. The result mode is doublet of odd-numbered symbols other than symbol 7 (
In the case of a special result mode consisting of "1,1,1", "3,3,3", "5,5,5", "9,9,9"), the third notification mode is selected. .. Further, when the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode consisting of doublets of the special symbol A (symbol A), the first notification mode is selected, and the result mode of the decoration special symbol variation display game is In the case of the special result mode consisting of doublets of special symbol B (symbol B), the second notification mode is selected, and the result mode of the decorative special symbol variation display game consists of doublets of special symbol C (symbol C). In the case of the special result mode, the third notification mode is selected.
In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the second notification mode is the most difficult to select, but the selection rate of the notification mode is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the third notification mode <second notification mode can be changed as appropriate. The order may be higher in the order of mode <first notification mode.

When the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is determined as the first notification mode, the effect control device 3
00 refers to the type distribution table of the first notification mode, and determines the type of the first notification mode based on the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
An example of the type distribution table of the first notification mode is shown in FIG. 64B (a). In the type distribution table of the first notification mode, the selection rate of the type and the corresponding type is set for each result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
In the example shown in FIG. 64B (a), when the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode consisting of doublets of even-numbered symbols, type 1 (“wow!”) Is type 2 ("wow!"). Type 2 ("Sure!") Is the type if it is easier to select than "Sure!") And the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode consisting of doublets of special symbol A. 1 (
It is easier to select than "Wow!").

Further, when the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is determined to be the second notification mode, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an undigested start memory.
Then, when there is no undigested start memory, the notification mode of the over winning notification effect is set to the second.
Instead of the notification mode, the first notification mode is determined, and the type of the first notification mode is determined to be, for example, type 2 (“as expected!”).
On the other hand, if there is undigested start memory, the look-ahead result information from the game control device 100 (
Whether or not there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit (a start memory corresponding to a special figure change display game in which the result is a big hit) in the undigested start memory based on the look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command). Is determined.

Then, when there is no start memory in which the result is a big hit in the undigested start memory, the reach system corresponding to the undigested start memory is acquired based on the pre-reading result information from the game control device 100. When there are a plurality of undigested start-up memories, for example, the most promising reach line among them is acquired. After that, the type of the second notification mode is determined based on the acquired reach system by referring to the type distribution table of the second notification mode for disconnection.
On the other hand, when there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit in the undigested start memory, the reach corresponding to the undigested start memory in which the result is a big hit is based on the pre-reading result information from the game control device 100. Get the lineage. When there are a plurality of undigested start-up memories for which the result is a big hit, for example, the reach line with the highest expectation is acquired. After that, the type of the second notification mode is determined based on the acquired reach system by referring to the type distribution table of the second notification mode for big hits.

An example of the type distribution table of the second notification mode for loss is shown in FIG. 64B (b), and an example of the type distribution table of the second notification mode for big hit is shown in FIG. 64B (c). In the type distribution table of the second notification mode, the selection rate of the type and the corresponding type is set for each reach system. In the examples shown in FIGS. 64B and 64B, the higher the expectation of the reach system, the easier it is to select the type with the higher expectation.
Type 4 of the second notification mode ("Congratulations!") Is selected only when there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit in the undigested start memory, so the type 4 of the second notification mode is over-winning. By executing the notification effect, it is possible to notify the occurrence of over-winning and to definitively suggest that there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit in the undigested start memory (see FIG. 62).

Further, when the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is determined to be the third notification mode, the effect control device 300 acquires the currently set probability setting value.
The effect control device 300 is a storage means (FeRAM 323) based on, for example, a command for ending the probability setting change (see step S421 in FIG. 11) transmitted from the game control device 100.
Etc.), it is configured to update the information (currently set probability setting value). Therefore, the effect control device 300 can acquire the probability set value currently set from the storage means. After that, the type of the third notification mode is determined by referring to the type distribution table of the third notification mode and based on the acquired probability setting value.
An example of the type distribution table of the third notification mode is shown in FIG. 64B (d). In the type distribution table of the third notification mode, the selection rate of the type and the corresponding type is set for each probability setting value.
Since type 4 of the third notification mode (“Congratulations!”) Is selected only when the probability setting value is “6”, by executing the over-winning notification effect in type 4 of the third notification mode, It is possible to notify the occurrence of over-winning and definitively suggest that the probability set value is "6" (see FIG. 62).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred.
The effect control device 300 stores information (large winning opening count number) stored in the storage means (FeRAM 323, etc.) based on, for example, a round command (see step A902 in FIG. 52) transmitted from the game control device 100. Information stored in the storage means (FeRAM 323, etc.) based on the large winning opening count command (see steps A207 and A211 in FIG. 51) transmitted from the game control device 100 while clearing 0 (large winning opening count number). ) Is configured to update +1. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can determine whether or not an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred based on the information stored in the storage means.
Alternatively, when the game control device 100 determines in the large winning opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 51) that the large winning opening count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step A218; Y), the large winning opening count number sets the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is exceeded, and if it is determined that the value is exceeded, a command for notifying that an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 is large based on this command. It is also possible to configure it so that it is determined that an over-winning to the winning opening has occurred.

Then, when it is determined that an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred, the effect control device 30
For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), at least one of the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b is used to execute the over-winning notification effect of the notification mode and type determined at the start of the special gaming state.
In the example shown in FIG. 63, the notification mode of the over winning notification effect is determined to be the second notification mode, and the over winning notification effect to be executed when the type of the second notification mode is determined to be type 3 is shown. ing. That is, the over-winning notification effect is executed in the type 3 of the second notification mode, the dialogue image "It's intense heat!" Is displayed on the display device 41, and the voice "It's intense heat!" Is output to the speaker 19a. , It is output from 19b. As a result, it is possible to notify the occurrence of over-winning and suggest that the jackpot expectation is high (see FIG. 62).

Here, as shown in FIG. 62, the same over-winning notification effect is executed when the type 4 of the second notification mode is selected and when the type 4 of the third notification mode is selected (that is,). A dialogue image "Congratulations!" Is displayed on the display device 41, or "Congratulations!"
Is output from the speakers 19a and 19b). As a result, the player cannot grasp whether the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is the second notification mode or the third notification mode at the time of executing the over-winning notification effect, but even if the game is continued (that is, , If the big hit is not obtained even if all the starting memories that were undigested at the time of executing the over winning notification effect are exhausted, it is the third notification mode (that is, the probability setting value is "6".
”), And the expectation of subsequent games will improve.

It is also possible to configure the occurrence of over-winning to be involved in a specific production. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), when an over-winning to the large winning opening occurs during the special game state, the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed after the end of the special game state. A pending change effect may be executed in which the mode is changed to notify (suggest) the look-ahead result. Also,"
"Involving the occurrence of over-winning in a specific effect" is not limited to "when an over-winning occurs during the special game state, the hold change effect is executed after the special game state", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, "If an over-winning occurs during the special game state, change the effect mode of the effect (round effect, interval effect, ending effect, round continuous notification effect, etc.) to be executed during the special game state". There may be.

In addition, the effect control device 300 counts the number of times over-winning to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) has occurred since the start of the special gaming state, and the round game in the final round in the special gaming state. During the round effect corresponding to, the over-winning evaluation effect for evaluating the number of over-winnings that occurred in the special gaming state may be executed.
As shown in FIG. 65A, for example, the over-prize evaluation effect includes an over-prize evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode (first effect mode) and an over-prize evaluation effect of the second evaluation mode (second effect mode). And the over-winning evaluation effect of the third evaluation mode (third effect mode).

The over-winning evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode can notify (suggest) the number of times the over-winning occurs in the special gaming state during execution, that is, the number of times the over-winning notification effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), there are two types of the first evaluation mode, type 1 and type 2, but of course, the type of the first evaluation mode is not limited to the two types. That is, the type of the first evaluation mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
The over-winning evaluation effect of the second evaluation mode notifies (suggests) the number of times of over-winning occurs in the special game state during execution, and also notifies the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a special result as a look-ahead notice. Can (suggest). In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), there are four types of the second evaluation mode, types 1 to 4, but of course, the types of the second evaluation mode are not limited to the four types. That is, the type of the second evaluation mode may be one type or a plurality of types.
The over-winning evaluation effect of the third evaluation mode notifies (suggests) the number of times over-winning occurs in the special gaming state being executed, and also notifies (suggests) the currently set probability setting value.
can do. In the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), the third evaluation mode includes types 1 to 1.
There are four types of 4, but of course, the type of the third evaluation mode is not limited to the four types. That is, the type of the third evaluation mode may be one type or a plurality of types.

For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the over-winning evaluation effect of the first evaluation mode, a display device displays a character image (for example, "The over-winning round was ○ times!") Notifying the number of times the over-winning occurred. It is displayed on 41. Then, the display mode of the character image is different between type 1 and type 2 of the first evaluation mode.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the over-winning evaluation effect of the second evaluation mode,
A character image for notifying the number of occurrences of over-winning and a character image of character A are displayed on the display device 41. Then, the display mode of the character image is the type 1 to 4 of the second evaluation mode.
Each is different.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), in the over-winning evaluation effect of the third evaluation mode,
A character image for notifying the number of occurrences of over-winning and a character image of character B are displayed on the display device 41. Then, the display mode of the character image is the type 1 to 4 of the third evaluation mode.
Each is different.

When the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit, the effect control device 300 sets the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the special game state).
Evaluation mode With reference to the distribution table (not shown), the evaluation mode of the over-winning evaluation effect to be executed during the special game state is determined based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game).
After that, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning evaluation effect is determined as the first evaluation mode, the effect control device 300 refers to the type distribution table (not shown) of the first evaluation mode and determines the predetermined conditions (not shown).
For example, the type of the first evaluation mode is determined based on the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game).

Further, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning evaluation effect is determined as the second evaluation mode, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is an undigested start memory.
Then, when there is no undigested start memory, the evaluation mode of the over-winning evaluation effect is set to the second.
Instead of the evaluation, the first evaluation mode is determined, and the type of the first evaluation mode is determined to be, for example, type 2.
On the other hand, if there is undigested start memory, the look-ahead result information from the game control device 100 (
Based on the look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command), it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit in the undigested start memory.

Then, when there is no start memory in which the result is a big hit in the undigested start memory, a predetermined condition (for example, undigested) is referred to with reference to the type distribution table (not shown) of the second evaluation mode for loss. The type of the second evaluation mode is determined based on the reach system corresponding to the starting memory of.
On the other hand, when there is a start memory in which the result is a big hit in the undigested start memory, the type distribution table (not shown) of the second evaluation mode for the big hit is referred to, and predetermined conditions (for example, undigested start memory) are referred to. The type of the second evaluation mode is determined based on the reach system corresponding to the starting memory).

Further, when the evaluation mode of the over-winning evaluation effect is determined as the third evaluation mode, the effect control device 300 refers to the type distribution table (not shown) of the third evaluation mode, and the probability currently set. The type of the third evaluation mode is determined based on the set value.
After that, the effect control device 300 uses the display device 41 to determine the evaluation mode and type at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the special game state) during the execution of the round effect corresponding to the round game of the final round. Perform over-winning evaluation production.

Here, the entire character image may be displayed in a display mode according to the determined type, or only a part (for example, a number part) of the character image may be displayed in the display mode according to the determined type. Is also good. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the type A of the first evaluation mode is selected and the number of over-winning rounds is 5, "the number of over-winning rounds is 5".
It was a time! Each character that composes the character string "" may be displayed in white, or only "5" among the characters that make up the character string "Over-winning round was 5 times!" Is displayed in white. , Other characters may be displayed in "other colors". “Other colors” are colors that do not correspond to each type of evaluation mode, such as black (white, blue, in the example shown in FIG. 65 (a)).
Colors other than green and red) are preferred. For example, when displaying only the number part of the character image in a display mode according to the determined type, the number part indicating the number of over-winning times (or the number of times the over-winning notification effect is executed) is different from other characters. Since they are displayed in different display modes, attention can be focused on the number part (that is, the part of the character image indicating the information that the player wants to know most). Furthermore, since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation and the probability setting depending on the display mode of the number part, the interest in over-winning is improved.

The display mode according to the type is not only the color, but also the transparency, font, angle (identity, italic, etc.), whether or not it can be recognized as 3D by the naked eye, and the movement of characters (whether or not it swings, sliding). The speed of operation may be different, etc.).
As for how to hold the data of the character image, for example, the data "The round that won the over prize was a round!" And the data of "Numbers (1 to 16 etc.)" are individually held and combined and displayed in the game machine. You may let it. The number of over-winning occurrences and the display mode are variable,
If you have all the feasible number of images with letters and numbers as data, the data capacity will increase, but if you have them individually, you can respond flexibly and the data capacity will be small.

Further, the timing for determining the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is not limited to the start of the special game state and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be at the start of each round game, or when an over-winning occurs. It may be.
Further, the timing for determining the type of notification mode is not limited to the start of the special game state and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be at the start of each round game or when an over-winning occurs. Is also good.
Further, the timing of determining the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect and the timing of determining the type of the notification mode do not have to be simultaneous. That is, the notification mode of the over winning notification effect may be determined at the start of the special game state, and then the type of the notification mode may be determined at the start of each round game.

In addition, the special result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game and the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect are 1.
It does not have to correspond with 1. That is, the first to third notification modes can be selected regardless of the special result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game, and the selection rate of the first to third notification modes according to the special result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game. May be different. Specifically, for example, when the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode consisting of doublets of even-numbered symbols, the first to third notification modes can be selected. 1 When the notification mode is most easily selected and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode consisting of doublet of symbol 7.
The first to third notification modes can be selected, and the second notification mode is most likely to be selected, and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special result mode composed of zorome of an odd symbol other than the symbol 7. In the case of, the first to third notification modes can be selected, the third notification mode is most likely to be selected among them, and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game consists of the Zoro eyes of the special symbol A. In the case of the special result mode, the first to third notification modes can be selected, the first notification mode is most likely to be selected, and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is Zoro of the special symbol B. In the case of the special result mode consisting of eyes, the first to third notification modes can be selected, the second notification mode is most likely to be selected, and the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is a special symbol. In the case of the special result mode consisting of the Zoro eyes of C, the first to third notification modes can be selected, and the third notification mode may be most easily selected among them.

Further, the information used for distributing the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is not limited to the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is a reach system corresponding to undigested start memory. It may be the result of a special figure variation display game based on undigested start memory.
Further, the information used for sorting the type of the first notification mode is not limited to the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is a reach system corresponding to undigested start memory. It may be the result of a special figure variation display game based on undigested start memory.
Further, the information used for sorting the type of the second notification mode is not limited to the reach system corresponding to the undigested start memory and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special figure variation display game based on the undigested start memory. It may be the result of.

Further, in addition to (or instead of) the case where the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs, the over-winning notification effect may be executed when the over-winning to the starting winning opening occurs. When an over-winning to the starting winning opening occurs, the starting winning is won when the number of memories of the first starting memory (starting memory corresponding to the winning to the starting winning opening 36) is the upper limit number (for example, 4). When a game ball wins in the mouth 36, or when the number of memories of the second start memory (starting memory corresponding to winning in the normal variable winning device 37) is the upper limit (for example, 4), the normal variable winning device This is the case when the game ball wins a prize in 37.
During the special time reduction (during Fuden support), big hits do not easily occur and the game balls on the upper plate 21 may disappear, causing a feeling of delay and a decrease in interest, but the start winning opening (starting winning opening) 36, When an over-winning to the normal variable winning device 37) occurs, by executing the over-winning notification effect, the points that can be watched increase and the interest of the game is improved. Further, by executing the over-winning notification effect, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the interest in the starting winning can be maintained.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions is a special result, the variable winning device (special variable winning device) In a game machine capable of converting 38) into a state in which a game ball can easily win a prize, when the number of prizes of the game ball to the variable winning device exceeds a predetermined number (in the case of this embodiment, the maximum number of prizes). In addition, the specified number breakthrough effect effect (effect control device 300) for executing the specified number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect) for notifying that the specified number has been exceeded is provided, and the specified number breakthrough effect effect means the specified number breakthrough effect. In the above, it is possible to notify that the specified number has been exceeded and to suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability setting value) (see FIG. 62).
Therefore, not only can it be notified that the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number by the specified number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect), but also predetermined information can be suggested. Can be enhanced.

The method of determining whether or not the specified number has been exceeded (that is, whether or not the specified number has been exceeded) is as follows.
It can be selected as appropriate. Specifically, in the present embodiment, for example, [1] it is determined whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening exceeds the "upper limit of winnings", and it is determined that the number of winnings exceeds the "upper limit of winnings". In some cases, it is possible to determine that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, execute the specified number breakthrough effect), and [2] the number of winning game balls to the large winning opening is equal to or less than the "upper limit number of winnings". It is also possible to determine whether or not the number has exceeded the specified number (that is, execute the specified number breakthrough effect) when it is determined that the number is not less than or equal to the "upper limit number of winnings". It is determined whether or not the number of winning game balls to the game is "upper limit number of winnings + 1", and when it is determined that the number of winnings is "upper limit number of winnings + 1", it is determined that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, the specified number exceeding effect (4) It is possible to determine whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening is "upper limit number of winnings + 1" or more, and if it is "upper limit number of winnings + 1" or more. If it is determined, it can be determined that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, the specified number exceeded effect is executed), and [5] the number of winning game balls to the large winning opening is "upper limit number of winnings + 1". It is also possible to determine whether or not the number is less than, and if it is determined that the number is not less than "upper limit number of winnings + 1", it is determined that the specified number has been exceeded (that is, the specified number breakthrough effect is executed).

Further, the specified number breakthrough effect may be executed not only in the special game state but also in the small hit game state. When the specified number breakthrough effect is executed during the small hit game state, the number of winning balls of the game ball to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) is the specified number (the maximum number of winnings, that is, the large winning opening during one round game). When the number of game balls that can be won is exceeded, the specified number is exceeded (over-winning notification effect).
May be executed.
Further, in a gaming machine equipped with a small hit RUSH mode (a production mode because small hits occur frequently), the number of payouts in the small hit RUSH mode is a predetermined number (for example, a specific special gaming state (for example,). Estimated number of payouts in a special gaming state where all 4Rs are short-opened) and assumptions in a predetermined period of a special gaming state (for example, a period of 1 to 4R in a special gaming state where all 4Rs are long-opened and all after 5Rs are short-opened) When the number of payouts or the specified number (for example, 1000) is exceeded, it is determined that the number of winning balls in the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) has exceeded the specified number, and the specified number has been exceeded. May be configured to execute. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that more game balls have been acquired than the predetermined number by the specified number breakthrough effect, and it is also possible to suggest predetermined information (in the case of this embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability setting value). Therefore, the small hit R
Where the number of game balls acquired in USH mode is increasing and the interest is increasing, the interest can be further increased by suggesting predetermined information, and the screen, sound, and LED can be watched without delay. ..

Further, the variable winning device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38, and may be a normal variable winning device 37. When the variable winning device is the normal variable winning device 37, the number of winnings of the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 in the one-time open state of the movable member 37b exceeds the specified number (for example, 3). The number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect) may be executed, or the number of stored second start memories (starting memory corresponding to the winning of the normal variable winning device 37) is the upper limit number (for example,).
When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the state of 4), it may be determined that the specified number has been exceeded, and the specified number breaking effect (over winning notification effect) may be executed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) is In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a round game is executed a plurality of times to convert a large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) into a state in which a gaming ball is easy to win when a special result is obtained.
Notification means for executing an over-winning notification effect for notifying the occurrence of over-winning when the number of winning balls to the large winning opening in a round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit (upper limit of winning (for example, 10)). (Effect control device 300) is provided, and the notification means can notify the occurrence of over-winning in the over-winning notification effect and suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability set value). (See FIG. 62).
Therefore, the over-winning notification effect can not only notify the occurrence of the over-winning to the large winning opening, but also suggest predetermined information, so that the over-winning notification effect can be enhanced.

In a specific round game (for example, the first round game, the final round game, the V round game, the probabilistic promotion effect execution round game), the over prize notification effect is not executed even if the over prize occurs. It is also possible to configure it as follows. Here, the "V-round game" includes a large winning opening having a V switch for detecting a game ball flowing into a specific area and a large winning opening having no V switch, and the game ball is detected by the V switch. In this case, in a gaming machine in which the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, it is a round game in which a large winning opening having a V switch is aimed at. Also,
The "probability change promotion effect" is an effect of determining whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and the "probability change promotion effect execution round game" is a probability change. It is a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

During the execution of the round game of the first round, an effect of notifying which kind of big hit has occurred (whether or not a probabilistic big hit has occurred, whether or not a 16R big hit has occurred, etc.) is executed.
In addition, during the execution of the round game of the final round, an effect of notifying the number of game balls acquired during the special game state is executed. In addition, during the execution of the V-round game, an effect of notifying the player to aim at the big winning opening having the V switch is executed. In addition, in the probabilistic promotion production execution round game,
Execute probabilistic promotion production, etc. These effects are specific effects that notify the game result and matters that affect the game results, that is, specific effects that notify the information that the player wants to know rather than over-winning. Therefore, by configuring not to execute the over-winning notification effect during the execution of the specific round game, the over-winning notification effect and the specific effect are not executed in duplicate, so that the specific effect is disturbed by the over-winning notification effect. Never. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest and to reliably notify the information that the player wants to know.

Further, at least in a specific round game, it is possible to execute an over-winning notification effect that does not interfere with the specific effect. Specifically, the effect device used for the specific effect and the effect device used for the over-winning notification effect may be different. That is, as the effect device, a display device (display device 41, etc.), an acoustic device (speakers 19a, 19b, etc.), a light emitting device (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.), an accessory device (board effect device 44, etc.), etc. ), Vibrating device (vibrating button, woofer, etc.), Blower (device that blows wind toward the player, etc.)
For example, in a specific round game, a display device and an audio device may be used to execute a specific effect, and a light emitting device and a blower may be used to execute an over-winning notification effect. With this configuration, even if the over-winning notification effect and the specific effect are executed in duplicate, the specific effect is not disturbed by the over-entry notification effect, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. In addition, since the specific effect can be executed together with the suggestion of predetermined information (in the case of this embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability set value), it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, it has a large winning opening that makes it easier for left-handed players to win a prize, and a large winning opening that makes it easier for right-handed players to win a prize. (Or change from right-handed to left-handed) In the gaming machine, from immediately before the change of the hitting method to immediately after the change, even if an over-winning occurs, the over-winning notification effect is not executed. Is also possible.

Further, in the specific round game, only the over-winning notification effect that also suggests predetermined information (in the case of this embodiment, the over-winning notification effect of the second notification mode or the third notification mode) can be executed, and other than the specific round game. In the round game of, only the over-winning notification effect that does not suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the over-winning notification effect of the first notification mode) may be executed. That is, in a specific round game, it is impossible to execute an over-winning notification effect that does not suggest predetermined information, and in a round game other than the specific round game, it is impossible to execute an over-winning notification effect that also notifies (suggests) predetermined information. Is also good.
Further, when the notification mode of the over-winning notification effect is determined to be the second notification mode or the third notification mode, type 4 is likely to be selected as the type of the notification mode in the specific round game (
Alternatively, only type 4 is selected). Alternatively, conversely, in a specific round game, it is difficult to select type 4 as the type of notification mode (or type 4).
Is not selected). Since the type 4 is the type with the highest degree of expectation, it can be said that the over-winning notification effect executed in the type 4 of the second notification mode and the type 4 of the third notification mode is an effect that catches the player's attention. By configuring such an over-winning notification effect (that is, an over-winning notification effect executed in type 4 of the second notification mode or type 4 of the third notification mode) not to be executed in a specific round game, it is specific. You can pay attention to the round game, and the interest will be improved.

In addition, when an over-winning occurs continuously from the first round game to a specific round game, in the round game after the specific round game, the over-winning is performed only in a specific notification mode when the over-winning occurs. The notification effect may be executed. Specifically, for example, if an over-winning occurs consecutively from the first round game to the fifth round game (that is, five times in a row), the sixth to 16th round games may be performed. When an over-winning occurs, the over-winning notification effect may be executed in the second notification mode or the third notification mode (that is, the over-winning notification effect in the first notification mode is not executed). Further, for example, when an over-winning occurs continuously from the first round game to the 15th round game (that is, 15 times in a row), the over-winning occurs in the 16th round game. At that time, the over-winning notification effect of the third notification mode may be executed (that is, the over-winning notification effect of the first notification mode and the over-winning notification effect of the second notification mode are not executed).
Further, when the over-winning occurs twice in a row, the over-winning notification effect may not be executed when the second over-winning occurs. As a result, the over-winning notification effect is not continuous (does not overlap), so that an easy-to-understand over-winning notification effect can be executed.

In addition, either the condition that an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred or the condition that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number (for example, 3 in one round) is satisfied. In that case, the over-winning notification effect may be executed. As a result, not only the condition that the over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred, but also the condition that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number is added to execute the over-winning notification effect. As the frequency increases, the interest will improve.
Alternatively, when both the condition that the over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred and the condition that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number, the over-winning notification effect is executed. You may try to do it.
Further, the over-winning notification effect may be executed not only during the special gaming state but also during the small hit gaming state.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning memory means (game control device 100) that stores the winning memory based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). , When a game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening with the winning memory stored up to a predetermined upper limit in the winning storage means, the specified number breakthrough effect (over-winning notification effect) for notifying that the specified number has been exceeded. The specified number breakthrough effect means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the specified number breakthrough effect means notifies that the specified number has been exceeded in the specified number breakthrough effect, and at the same time,
It can be configured so that predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability set value) can be suggested.
With this configuration, not only can it be notified that the number of winning game balls to the starting winning opening has exceeded the specified number by the specified number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect), but also predetermined information can be suggested. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that exceeds the specified number.

That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning memory means (game control device 100) that stores the winning memory based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). , When a game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening with the winning memory stored up to a predetermined upper limit in the winning storage means, a notification means (effect control) for executing an over winning notification effect for notifying the occurrence of over winning. The device 300) is provided, and the notification means is configured to be able to notify the occurrence of over-winning and suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability set value) in the over-winning notification effect. be able to.
With this configuration, the over-winning notification effect can not only notify the occurrence of over-winning to the starting winning opening, but also suggest predetermined information, so that the over-winning notification effect can be enhanced.
For example, when the decorative special figure start memory display is shifted, the high-expected reach effect is executed during the pending change effect that notifies (suggests) the look-ahead result by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. When the effect that the player pays attention to is being executed, such as during the display of the result mode in the decoration special figure variation display game (the symbol is stopped), the over is notified of the occurrence of the over prize at the start winning opening. It may be configured not to execute the winning notification effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a setting means (game) capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) is assigned. The control device 100) is provided, and the specified number breakthrough effect means (effect control device 300) includes a first effect mode (first notification mode) for notifying that the specified number has been exceeded without suggesting predetermined information.
In addition to notifying that the specified number has been exceeded, the second production mode (second notification mode) that suggests the expected degree (big hit expectation degree) that the result of the game will be a special result as predetermined information, and the specified number have been exceeded. In addition to notifying, it is possible to execute a predetermined number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect) in any of the third effect mode (third notification mode) that suggests the probability setting value as predetermined information (over-winning notification effect). (See FIG. 62).
With this configuration, it is possible to notify that the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number by the specified number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect), as well as the jackpot expectation degree and the probability setting value. Can also be suggested, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the production that exceeds the specified number.

The predetermined information that can be suggested by the over-winning notification effect is not limited to the jackpot expectation of the undigested start memory and the currently set probability setting value, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the undigested start memory It may be the reach occurrence expectation degree, or the probability change transition expectation degree of the undigested start memory.
Further, the specified number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect) includes the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the L of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46.
Any effect may be used as long as it is an effect of notifying (suggesting) the occurrence of over-winning or predetermined information by at least one of the light emission of the ED and the operation of the board effect device 44. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with a vibrating device or a blower as a directing device, it is also possible to execute a predetermined number breakthrough effect (over winning notification effect) by using the vibrating device or the blower. ..

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, an evaluation effect (over-winning evaluation effect) for evaluating the number of times the specified number of breakthrough effects (over-winning notification effect) is executed (that is, the number of times over-winning occurs) is executed. The evaluation effect means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the evaluation effect means can execute the evaluation effect during the execution of a specific round game (in the case of the present embodiment, the round game of the final round) in the special gaming state. Yes, in the evaluation effect, it is possible to evaluate the number of executions and to suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree and the probability setting value) (see FIG. 65).
With this configuration, not only the specified number breaking effect (over winning notification effect) but also the specified number breaking effect (over winning notification effect) is used to notify that the number of winning balls to the winning opening has exceeded the predetermined number.
Since it is also possible to execute an evaluation effect (over-winning evaluation effect) that evaluates the number of executions of the specified number breakthrough effect, an effect that notifies that the number of winning game balls to the winning opening has exceeded a predetermined specified number. Can enhance the interest of.

The evaluation effect (over-winning evaluation effect) includes the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. It suffices as long as it is an effect of notifying (suggesting) the number of occurrences of over-winning and predetermined information by at least one of the actions of. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with a vibration device or a blower as an effect device, it is also possible to execute an evaluation effect (over-winning evaluation effect) by using the vibration device or the blower.
In addition, when an over-winning occurs in the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37), the specified number breakthrough effect (over-winning notification effect) is executed, and the number of times the specified number breakthrough effect is executed in a predetermined period. An evaluation effect (over-winning evaluation effect) for evaluating the above may be executed. In addition, when the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number (for example, 3 in one round), the specified number breakthrough effect is executed, and the number of times the specified number breakthrough effect is executed in a predetermined period is evaluated. An evaluation effect may be executed.
Which of the winning openings to be the target of the evaluation production (whether it is a big winning opening, a starting winning opening, or a general winning opening) may be changed according to the type of big hit and the game state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specified number breakthrough effect effect means (effect control device 300).
Can be configured to notify that the specified number has been exceeded and to suggest predetermined information (in the case of the present embodiment, a jackpot expectation degree and a probability set value) in the specified number breakthrough effect.
Therefore, the specified number breakthrough effect (over-winning notification effect) can not only notify that the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device has exceeded the specified number, but can also suggest predetermined information, so that the game ball to the winning opening can be suggested. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that notifies that the number of prizes has exceeded a predetermined number.
When the evaluation effect (over prize evaluation effect) is configured to be executable, the specified number breakthrough effect (over prize notification effect) does not have to be able to suggest predetermined information.

<Production of winning number notification>
The gaming machine 10 can execute a winning number notification effect that notifies the number of gaming balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) during the round game. The effect control device 300 executes a jackpot effect (fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, and ending effect) during the special game state. The winning number notification effect is executed in the round effect of the big hit medium effect.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings (that is, the number of game balls that can be won in the large winning opening during one round game) is 10, but the maximum number of winnings is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. is there.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the game control device 100 ends the display time (stop display time of the special figure) set in step A603 of the special figure changing process (FIG. 22). Then, the jackpot fanfare time (see step A720 in FIG. 23) is set, and the fanfare command (see step A716 in FIG. 23) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the game control device 100.
The fanfare production is started based on the reception of the fanfare command from.

Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the set jackpot fanfare time ends, the game control device 100 opens the first round of the jackpot opening time (step A in FIG. 52).
(See 907 and A908) are set to start the first round game, and a round command (see step A902 in FIG. 52) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 66B, for example, the effect control device 300 starts a round effect corresponding to the first round game based on the reception of the round command from the game control device 100.

Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the set large winning opening opening time ends, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time (see steps A1005 and A1006 in FIG. 53) and also sets the interval. A command (see step A1007 in FIG. 53) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 66B, for example, the effect control device 300 starts the interval effect based on the reception of the interval command from the game control device 100.

Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the game control device 100 sets an interval time (see step A1109 in FIG. 54) when the set remaining ball processing time ends.
Next, when the set interval time ends, the game control device 100 sets the second round large winning opening opening time, starts the second round game, and transmits a round command to the effect control device 300. .. The effect control device 300 is, for example, FIG. 66 (
As shown in b), based on the reception of the round command from the game control device 100, the round effect corresponding to the second round game is started.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the opening time of the large winning opening in the final round is completed, the game control device 100 has the remaining ball processing time for the final round (step A1008 in FIG. 53).
(See) and the ending command (see step A1009 in FIG. 53).
Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 starts the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command from the game control device 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b).
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the set remaining ball processing time ends, the game control device 100 sets the ending time (see step A1115 in FIG. 54).
When the set ending time ends, the special game state ends.

FIG. 67 shows an example of processing related to the winning number notification effect.
As shown in FIG. 67 (a), for example, the effect control device 300 is as shown in FIG. 67 (b) when the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is completed. , Start fanfare production.
Next, when the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control device 300, for example, shows FIG. 67 (c).
), The round production corresponding to the first round game is started. Further, at the same time as the start of the round effect, the winning number notification effect is started, and the same number of winning notification images M1 as the maximum number of winnings (10) are displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the maximum number of winnings in the round game being executed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 67 (d) to 67 (f), for example, the effect control device 300 erases one winning notification image M1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. As a result, the number of erased prize notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the grand prize opening in the running round game, so that the player has won the grand prize opening in the running round game. The number of game balls can be grasped. And if an over-winning to the big winning opening occurs,
The over-winning notification effect is executed (see FIG. 63 (b)).
Next, the effect control device 300 starts the interval effect when the round effect corresponding to the first round game is completed.
Next, when the interval effect is completed, the effect control device 300, for example, shows FIG. 67 (g).
As shown in the above, a round effect corresponding to the second round game is started, and a prize number notification effect is started to display the same number of prize notification images M1 as the maximum number of prizes. Then, each time the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the winning notification image M1 is deleted one by one, and when an over winning in the large winning opening occurs, the over winning notification effect is executed. Production control device 300
Repeats such a process until the round game of the final round is completed.

Here, since the winning number notification effect starts together with the round effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the execution time of the fanfare effect is long and the fanfare effect does not end even if the large winning opening opening time starts. There is a possibility that a game ball will win a prize in the large winning opening during the execution of the fanfare production, that is, before the start of the winning number notification production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the large winning opening before the start of the winning number notification effect, the prize is won in the large winning opening after the winning number notification production starts and before the start of the winning number notification production. The same number of winning notification images M1 as the number of game balls played are deleted one by one.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68A, for example, when the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is completed, the effect control device 300 is, for example, FIG.
As shown in 8 (b), the fanfare production is started. Then, the game ball wins a prize at the big prize opening during the execution of the fanfare production. Here, it is assumed that two game balls win a prize in the big prize opening during the execution of the fanfare production.
Next, when the fanfare effect is completed, the effect control device 300, for example, shows FIG. 68 (c).
), The round effect corresponding to the first round game is started, the winning number notification effect is started, and the same number of winning notification images M1 as the maximum number of winnings are displayed. Then, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (d) to 68 (e), the same number of winning notification images M1 as the number of game balls that won the large winning opening during the execution of the fanfare effect (that is, before the start of the winning number notification effect) are displayed. 1
Erase one by one. As a result, the number of erased prize notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening during the execution of the fanfare production, so that the player can perform the fanfare production (that is, the number of winning notification effects). It is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have won a prize in the big prize opening (before the start).
After that, as shown in FIGS. 68 (f) to (g), for example, the effect control device 300 erases one winning notification image M1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening. Then, when an over-winning occurs in the large winning opening, the over-winning notification effect is executed (see FIG. 63 (b)).

The fanfare effect may be, for example, a start notification effect for notifying the start of a special gaming state as shown in FIG. 67 (b), or a player effect button 25 (touch panel) as shown in FIG. 68 (b), for example. It may be an operation intervention effect in which the operation of (including 29) is intervened.
The operation intervention effect to be executed as a fanfare effect is, for example, an effect of selecting music to be output from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the big hit effect (see FIG. 68 (b)), and a character appearing during the execution of the big hit effect. The effect of selecting the effect, the effect of selecting the effect mode of the big hit medium effect, and the like.

The erasing mode of the winning notification image M1 can be appropriately selected. For example, the winning notification image M1
May disappear instantly, or the winning notification image M1 may gradually fade and disappear (fade out mode), or the winning notification image M1 moves out of the display area of the display device 41. It may be a mode in which it moves and disappears, or it may be a mode in which the winning notification image M1 is blown out of the display area of the display device 41 by a predetermined character image and disappears.
In addition, when consecutive winnings occur in the large winning opening (that is, when a plurality of game balls flow into the large winning opening substantially at the same time), the consecutive winning game balls are in an erasing mode different from the normal erasing mode. The same number of winning notification images M1 may be deleted. For example, when the normal erasing mode is a mode in which the winning notification mode M disappears instantly and the winning notification mode M is erased one by one, the same number of winning notification modes M1 as the number of consecutively won game balls disappears instantly. The winning notification modes M1 may be erased at the same time in the mode, or the same number of winning notification modes M1 as the number of consecutively won game balls may be erased one by one (or at the same time) in the fade-out mode.

Further, in the round effect corresponding to a specific round game (for example, a round game in which the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening is set), the winning number notification effect may not be executed.
In addition, if the production mode of the prize number notification effect executed during the round production corresponding to the specific round game is different from the production mode of the prize number notification effect executed during the round production corresponding to the round game other than the specific round game. You may let me. Specifically, for example, in the winning number notification effect executed during a round game (a round game other than a specific round game) in which a large winning opening opening time for long opening is set, for example, it is shown in FIGS. 67 and 68. In this way, a round game (specific round) in which the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening is set by executing only the erasing effect of erasing the winning notification image M1 one by one each time the game ball wins the large winning opening. In the winning number notification effect executed during the game), for example, as shown in FIG. 69A, the erasing effect is performed together with the erasing effect of erasing the winning notification images M1 one by one each time the game ball wins a prize at the large winning opening. Other effects may be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (a), as an effect other than the erasure effect, a predetermined character appears based on the game ball winning a prize in the large winning opening, and the character has a predetermined line (“Wow”).
Etc.) are being performed.

Further, in the winning number notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69B, the game ball wins a prize at the large winning opening without displaying the same number of winning notification images M1 as the maximum number of winnings at the start of the winning number notification effect. The effect may be such that one winning notification image M1 appears for each. In this case, since the number of the displayed winning notification images M1 matches the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening in the running round game, the player wins the large winning opening in the running round game. It is possible to grasp the number of game balls played.
In this case, if the game ball wins a prize at the large winning opening before the start of the prize number notification effect (that is, during the execution of the fanfare effect), after the prize number notification effect starts, before the start of the prize number notification effect. The same number of winning notification images M1 as the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening are made to appear one by one. Further, in this case, the appearance mode of the winning notification image M1 can be appropriately selected. For example, the winning notification image M1 may appear instantly, or the winning notification image M1 gradually becomes darker (fade-in). Aspect), or the winning notification image M1 may move from outside the display area of the display device 41 to a fixed position in the display area. Further, in this case, when continuous winning is generated in the large winning opening (that is, when a plurality of game balls flow into the large winning opening at substantially the same time), the continuous winning is performed in an appearance mode different from the normal appearance mode. The winning notification image M1 may be configured to appear in the same number as the number of game balls played.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the current number of rounds may be notified by the round notification image M2. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (c), one round notification image M2 appears each time the round effect is executed, that is, the number of displayed round notification images M2 matches the current number of rounds. However, the reverse is also possible. That is, the same number of round notification images M2 as the upper limit of the number of rounds (“16” or “4” in the case of this embodiment) is being produced in fanfare (or at the start of the round effect corresponding to the first round game). The round notification image M2 may be deleted one by one each time the round effect is executed. In this case, the number of displayed round notification images M2 matches the number of remaining rounds.
Further, the round notification image M2 and the number of rounds do not have to correspond with each other at a ratio of 1: 1. That is, every time a predetermined plurality of (for example, 4 times) round effects are executed, the round notification image M
2 may appear one by one. Or, conversely, "upper limit of the number of rounds ÷ predetermined multiple times"
The same number of round notification images M2 as the above may be displayed during the fanfare production or the like, and one round notification image M2 may be deleted each time the predetermined plurality of round effects are executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69 (c), the same number of dotted line ○ images as the upper limit of the number of rounds (that is,
The image showing the area where the round notification image M2 is displayed) is displayed during the fanfare production, etc., but it is not necessary to display the same number of dotted line ○ images as the upper limit of the number of rounds from the beginning. For example, as the big winning opening opening information showing the big hit pattern, the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and the big winning opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R are long opening, 5 to 16R are short opening). When any of the above is selected, the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round, and if the selected large winning opening opening information 2 is the large winning opening opening information 2, the round continuation notification effect is notified in the round continuation notification effect. Even in the 5th and subsequent rounds, if the large winning opening is opened with a long opening and the selected large winning opening opening information is the large winning opening opening information 3, a rank-down effect is performed in the round continuous notification production and the round. The discontinuation is notified, and the big winning opening may be opened with a short opening in the 5th and subsequent rounds. In such a case, first display 4 dotted lines ○ images,
Even if the remaining dotted line ○ image is displayed when the round continuation notification effect is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the remaining dotted line ○ image is not displayed when the round discontinuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect. good. As a result, it is possible to notify that the subsequent rounds are open for a long time by the additionally displayed dotted line ○ image, and the interest is improved.
The winning notification image M1 and the round notification image M2 are not limited to the circular image and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the winning notification image M1 or the round notification image M2 may be a polygonal image or a character image. Further, the winning notification image M1 and the round notification image M2 may have different shapes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, for example, the winning notification image M1 is displayed on the front side of the predetermined image displayed in the display area of the display device 41, that is, the display device 4
The predetermined image displayed in 1 may be hidden.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), for example, the effect control device 300 starts the prize number notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and has the same number of panels as the maximum number of prizes (here, a rectangular panel). The winning notification image M1 (shaped) is displayed on the front side of a predetermined image (here, a character image, a dialogue image, and a decorative image) displayed on the display device 41. After that, the effect control device 3
For 00, for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 (b) to 71 (g), each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the winning notification image M1 is deleted one by one. As a result, the predetermined image hidden by the panel-shaped prize notification image M1 having the same number as the maximum number of prizes becomes gradually visible. Then, when an over-winning occurs in the large winning opening, the over-winning notification effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (h). Here, an over-winning notification effect using a predetermined image hidden by the winning notification image M1 is executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the predetermined image is a character image, a dialogue image, and a decorative image, but the predetermined image is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the shape and size of the panel-shaped prize notification image M1 is the shape and size of a small area obtained by dividing the display area of the display device 41 by the same number as the maximum number of prizes. Since they are the same, the entire predetermined image displayed on the display device 41 is concealed by the same number of panel-shaped winning notification images M1 as the maximum number of winnings, but the panel-shaped winning notification image M1
The shape and size of the can be changed as appropriate. That is, it is sufficient that at least a part of the predetermined image displayed on the display device 41 can be concealed by the panel-shaped prize notification images M1 having the same number as the maximum number of prizes.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 71, the over-winning notification effect is executed when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs, but the over-winning notification effect is also started at the start of the winning notification effect, and the panel-shaped winning is performed. The notification image M1 may conceal an image related to the over-winning notification effect (for example, the image shown in FIG. 71 (h), hereinafter referred to as “over-winning notification image”). Specifically, at the start of the winning number notification effect, the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 having the same number as the "upper limit number of winnings + 1" is displayed on the front side of the over winning notification image as a predetermined image. At that time, other than the dialogue image in the over winning notification image (for example, a character image or a decorative image)
Is concealed by the same number of panel-shaped prize notification images M1 as the maximum number of prizes, and the dialogue image (for example, "It's intense heat!") Of the over prize notification images is the remaining panel-shaped prize notification image. Make it concealed by M1. Then, every time the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the winning notification image M1 that hides the lines other than the dialogue image is deleted one by one, and when an over-winning occurs, the winning notification image M1 that hides the dialogue image is deleted. You may try to do it. As a result, a part of the over-winning notification image can be visually recognized even before the over-winning occurs, so that the interest in over-winning is improved.

Furthermore, in this case, the condition that an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred and the general winning opening 3
Even if the winning notification image M1 that hides the dialogue image is deleted when one of the conditions that the number of winnings of the game balls to 5 exceeds the specified number (for example, 3 in one round) is satisfied. good. As a result, not only the condition that the over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred, but also the condition that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number is added to conceal the dialogue image. Since the erasure probability of the broadcast image M1 is increased, the interest is improved.
Alternatively, if both the condition that the over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred and the condition that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 35 exceeds the specified number, the winning that hides the dialogue image. The broadcast image M1 may be erased.
Further, in this case, the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 hides the over winning notification image (
An image (for example, a translucent image) that makes the over-winning notification image difficult to see may be used instead of the image that makes it invisible. As a result, even if the winning notification image M1 that hides the dialogue image is not erased, the content of the notification or suggestion by the over-winning notification effect can be estimated, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the panel-shaped winning notification image M1 (the winning notification image M1 that makes the predetermined image invisible, or the winning notification image M1 that makes the predetermined image difficult to see) is a large winning opening. Instead of erasing when the game ball wins a prize or when an over prize occurs, it may be changed so that it gradually becomes transparent. In this case, the portion of the predetermined image hidden by the winning notification image M1 becomes visible through the transparent winning notification image M1.

In addition, the winning number notification effect is the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, and the speaker 19.
Sound from a, 19b, LED light emission of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, board production device 4
It suffices as long as it is an effect of notifying the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening in the round game being executed by at least one of the actions of 4. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with a vibration device or a blower as an effect device, it is also possible to execute the winning number notification effect by using the vibration device or the blower.
That is, as shown in FIG. 72, for example, the winning number notification effect may be an effect of notifying the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening in the running round game by emitting light from the LED of the frame decoration device 18. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72A, for example, the effect control device 300 starts the winning number notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and the LED of the frame decoration device 18 is started.
Among them, the LED arranged in the predetermined area of the glass frame 15 is turned on. Here, the glass frame 1
The predetermined regions of 5 are regions 15a to 15j having the same number as the maximum number of winnings (10).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) to 72 (c), for example, each time the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the effect control device 300 shifts from the LED arranged in the first region 15a to the second region 15b. Arranged LED → LED arranged in the third area 15c → LED arranged in the fourth area 15d
→ LED arranged in the 5th area 15e → LED arranged in the 6th area 15f → 7th area 1
The LED is turned off in the order of the LED arranged in the 5g → the LED arranged in the 8th area 15h → the LED arranged in the 9th area 15i → the LED arranged in the 10th area 15j. As a result, the number of non-luminous regions matches the number of game balls that have won the large prize opening in the running round game, so that the player can win the large winning opening in the running round game. You can figure out the number.
Alternatively, conversely, LEs arranged in a predetermined area of the glass frame 15 at the start of the winning number notification effect.
Each time the D is turned off and the game ball wins the big prize opening, the LED arranged in the first area 15a
→ The LED arranged in the second area 15b → the LED arranged in the third area 15c → ... May be turned on in this order. In this case, since the number of light emitting regions matches the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening in the running round game, the player has the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening in the running round game. Can be grasped.

Further, instead of the winning number notification effect, it is also possible to execute a payout number notification effect that notifies the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.
Further, as shown in FIG. 73, for example, the payout number notification effect notifies the sum of the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening and the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35. It may be a production to do.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73A, the effect control device 300 starts the payout number notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and displays the total number of payouts in the running round game. Then, each time a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, for example, "+3" is added to the total number of payouts, and every time a game ball wins in the large winning opening, for example, "+15" is added to the total number of payouts. .. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening or the general winning opening 35 and the payout is made based on the winning, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, during the execution of the fanfare effect, that is, before the start of the payout number notification effect. As shown, after the payout number notification effect is started, the number of game balls paid out during the execution of the fanfare effect is added to the total number of payouts. As a result, the player can grasp the total number of payouts in the round game being executed, which improves the interest.
In this case, the payout number notification effect may not be an effect of notifying the total number of payouts in the running round game, but may be an effect of notifying the total number of payouts in the special game state being generated. That is, when the next round game starts, the total number of payouts will not be cleared to 0.
The total number of payouts may be continuously updated (added) until the special game state ends.
As a result, the player can grasp the total number of payouts in one special game state, which improves the interest.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 73B, the effect control device 300 starts the payout number notification effect at the same time as the start of the round effect, and displays the remaining number of payouts in the running round game. Then, every time the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, for example, "+3" is subtracted from the remaining number of payouts, and every time the game ball wins the large winning opening, for example, "+15" is subtracted from the remaining number of payouts. .. Furthermore, when the game balls are paid out even if the remaining number of payouts becomes "0" (that is, when the game balls are paid out in excess of the expected number of payouts in one round game).
Is to execute a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a character image such as "?" Or "Yeah!"). Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening or the general winning opening 35 and the payout is made based on the winning, for example, as shown in FIG. 75, during the execution of the fanfare effect, that is, before the start of the payout number notification effect. As shown, after the payout number notification effect is started, the number of game balls paid out during the execution of the fanfare effect is subtracted from the remaining payout number. As a result, the player can grasp the number of remaining payouts in the running round game and the number of game balls paid out in excess of the expected number of payouts in one round game, which improves the interest.

In this case, the payout number notification effect may not be an effect of notifying the remaining number of payouts in the running round game, but may be an effect of notifying the remaining number of payouts in the special game state being generated. That is, when the next round game starts, the estimated number of payouts in one round game (for example, "150") is not displayed and the estimated number of payouts is not subtracted, but at the start of the first round game. Estimated number of payouts in one special game state (for example, "2000")
May be displayed and the estimated number of payouts may be continuously subtracted until the special gaming state ends. As a result, the player can grasp the number of remaining payouts in one special game state, which improves the interest.

The payout number notification effect is the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, and the speakers 19a and 1
At least one of the sound from 9b, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 notifies the number of game balls that have won the grand prize opening in the running round game. Any directing is fine. Further, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with a vibration device or a blower as the effect device, it is also possible to execute the payout number notification effect by using the vibration device or the blower.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions is a special result, a large winning opening (special variation winning device) is obtained. A production control means (effect control device 3) for controlling the production of a game in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a round game is executed a plurality of times to convert 38) into a state in which a game ball is easily won.
00) is provided, and the round game ends when the number of winning balls to the large winning opening reaches the specified number (upper limit number of winnings) or when the predetermined time (opening time of the large winning opening) has elapsed. The effect control means can execute a special game during effect (big hit effect) including a start effect (fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round effect performed during the round game, and the special game state. During the execution of the specific round game (in the case of the present embodiment, the first round game) in the above, it is possible to end the start effect and start the round effect corresponding to the specific round game (Fig.). 66 (c)), in the round production, it is possible to execute the winning number notification production corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening, and in the round production corresponding to the specific round game after the start production is completed. , The winning number notification effect for the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening during the execution of the start effect is executed (see FIG. 68).

Therefore, in the round production, it is possible to execute the winning number notification production corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening, and further, in the round production corresponding to the specific round game after the start production is completed, the relevant round production is performed. Since the winning number notification effect for the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening during the execution of the start effect is executed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the special game in-game effect (big hit in-game effect).
The specific round game is not limited to the first round game (first round game). That is, the specific round game may be a round game other than the first round game, such as a second round game.
Further, the winning number notification effect may be executed not only during the special gaming state but also during the small hit gaming state.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the round production, after displaying the same number of predetermined images (winning notification image M1) as the specified number, the predetermined image is deleted for each winning of the game ball to the large winning opening. It is possible to execute the winning number notification effect, the predetermined image is not displayed in the start effect, and if the game ball wins the big prize opening during the execution of the start effect, it corresponds to a specific round game. The winning number notification effect executed in the round effect can be configured to erase predetermined images corresponding to the number of game balls that have won a prize in the large winning opening during the execution of the start effect (see FIG. 68).

With this configuration, the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening in the running round game can be notified, and the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening before the start of the prize number notification effect can also be notified. It is possible to enhance the interest of the special game production (big hit production).
Further, since the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) is not displayed during the start effect (fanfare effect) and the predetermined image is displayed only during the round effect, the predetermined image is always displayed (the predetermined image is also displayed during the start effect). Is displayed), it is possible to give a special feeling to the round effect. Therefore, since the interest of the round production is improved, the interest of the production during the special game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a special effect (fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round effect performed during the round game. It is possible to execute the effect during the game (effect during the big hit), and during the execution of the specific round game (in the case of this embodiment, the first round game) in the special game state, the start effect is terminated and the specific round game is executed. It is possible to start a round effect corresponding to the round game (see FIG. 66 (c)), and in the round effect, a predetermined image (winning notification) for each winning of the game ball to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38). It is possible to execute the winning number notification effect of displaying the image M1) (see FIG. 69 (b)), and the predetermined image is not displayed in the start effect.
If a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during the execution of the start effect, the winning number notification effect executed in the round production corresponding to the specific round game is performed, and the large winning opening is entered during the execution of the start effect. It can be configured to display a predetermined number of images for the number of winning game balls.

With this configuration, the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening in the running round game can be notified, and the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening before the start of the prize number notification effect can also be notified. It is possible to enhance the interest of the special game production (big hit production).
Further, since the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) is not displayed during the start effect (fanfare effect) and the predetermined image is displayed only during the round effect, the predetermined image is always displayed (the predetermined image is also displayed during the start effect). Is displayed), it is possible to give a special feeling to the round effect. Therefore, since the interest of the round production is improved, the interest of the production during the special game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the player to select one option from a plurality of options in the start effect (fanfare effect) (operation intervention). The effect) can be configured to be feasible (Fig. 6).
8 (b)).
With this configuration, the merit of not displaying the predetermined image (winning notification image M1) during the start effect (fanfare effect) can be expanded. That is, since the predetermined image is not displayed during the start effect, it is possible to concentrate on the selected effect, which improves the interest of the start effect and enhances the interest of the effect during the special game.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a general winning opening 35 in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning of the game balls, and an effect control means (effect control device 3) for controlling the effect of the game.
00) and, in the round game, when the number of winnings (upper limit number of winnings) of the game ball to the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) reaches the specified number, or the predetermined time (large winning opening opening time) ) Elapses, and the effect control means is a special in-game effect (big hit effect) that includes a start effect (fanfare effect) performed at the start of the occurrence of the special game state and a round effect performed during the round game. Is possible, and during the execution of a specific round game (in the case of this embodiment, the first round game) in the special game state, the start effect is ended and the round effect corresponding to the specific round game is performed. It is possible to start (see FIG. 66 (c)), and in the round production, it is possible to execute a payout number notification effect corresponding to the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening and the general winning opening 35. , In the round effect corresponding to a specific round game after the start effect is completed, the large winning opening and the general winning opening 35 during the execution of the start effect
It can be configured to execute the payout number notification effect for the payout number based on the winning of the game ball to (see FIGS. 74 and 75).
With this configuration, in the round production, it is possible to execute the payout number notification effect corresponding to the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening and the general winning opening 35, and further, the start production is completed. In the round effect corresponding to the specific round game later, it is possible to execute the payout number notification effect for the number of payouts based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening and the general winning opening 35 during the execution of the start effect. Because it can be done, it is possible to enhance the interest of the special game production (big hit production).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 35 General winning slot 38 Special variable winning device (variable winning device, large winning slot)
100 Game control device (setting means)
300 production control device (prescribed number breakthrough production means, evaluation production means, production control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that generates a predetermined gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition becomes a special result.
When a predetermined numerical value in the predetermined gaming state exceeds a predetermined number, a specified number breakthrough effect means for executing a specified number breakthrough effect for notifying that the predetermined number has been exceeded is provided.
The specified number breakthrough effect means can suggest predetermined information in the specified number breakthrough effect.
The predetermined information includes a first predetermined information and a second predetermined information of a type different from the first predetermined information.
When the result mode of the game is the first result mode, the first predetermined information is suggested as the predetermined information, and the result mode of the game is a second result mode different from the first result mode. The game machine is characterized in that the second predetermined information is suggested as the predetermined information.

Images